2009 Volvo V50 Owners Manual

VOLVO V50
Owner's Manual
Web Edition
Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust
that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an
automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We
encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment
descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also
urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in
this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate
a vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any
impairment that could hinder your ability to drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety and emission standards. For further information please contact your
retailer, or:
In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care
Center
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647-0914
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocanada.com
2008 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved.
Contents
00 Introduction
01 Safety
General information.................................. 10
Volvo and the environment....................... 12
Important warnings................................... 13
Occupant safety........................................
Seat belts..................................................
Supplemental Restraint System...............
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)..............
Side impact protection airbags.................
Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)....................
Whiplash Protection System.....................
Crash mode..............................................
Child safety...............................................
Child restraint systems.............................
Infant seats...............................................
Convertible seats......................................
Booster cushions......................................
ISOFIX lower anchors...............................
Top tether anchors....................................
Child restraint registration and recalls......
02 Instruments and controls
16
18
21
26
29
30
31
33
34
36
37
39
41
42
44
45
Instrument overview..................................
Instrument panel.......................................
Indicator and warning symbols.................
Symbols – instrument panel.....................
Information display...................................
12-volt sockets.........................................
Lighting panel...........................................
Left-side steering wheel lever...................
Trip computer...........................................
Cruise control (option)...............................
Right-side steering wheel lever.................
Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers................................................
Parking brake............................................
Power windows.........................................
Mirrors.......................................................
Power moonroof (option)..........................
Personal settings......................................
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
(option)......................................................
00 01 02
4
48
51
53
55
58
60
61
64
66
68
70
73
74
75
77
80
82
85
Contents
03 Climate
General information..................................
Air vents....................................................
Manual climate control..............................
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) –
option........................................................
Air distribution...........................................
04 Interior
90
92
93
Front seats..............................................
Interior lighting........................................
Storage compartments...........................
Rear seat.................................................
Cargo area..............................................
05 Locks and alarm
102
105
107
111
113
Remote control and key blade................
Keyless drive (option as available)..........
Locking and unlocking............................
Child safety locks....................................
Alarm (option)..........................................
03 04 05
96
99
118
123
127
129
130
5
Contents
06 Starting and driving
General information................................
Fuel requirements...................................
Ignition switch.........................................
Starting the vehicle.................................
Starting the vehicle with keyless drive
(option as available)................................
Manual transmission, 5-speed (certain
markets only)...........................................
Manual transmission, 6-speed (certain
markets only)...........................................
Automatic transmission (option).............
Shiftlock override....................................
All Wheel Drive (option)...........................
Brake system..........................................
Stability system.......................................
Towing....................................................
Jump starting..........................................
Towing a trailer.......................................
Detachable trailer hitch...........................
Transporting loads..................................
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–
option......................................................
Park assist (Option/accessory)...............
07 Wheels and tires
136
140
143
144
General information................................
Tire inflation.............................................
Inflation pressure—U.S. models ............
Inflation pressure—Canadian models ....
Tire designations.....................................
Glossary of tire terminology....................
Vehicle loading........................................
Uniform tire quality gradings...................
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires. .
Temporary spare.....................................
Wheel nuts..............................................
Tire rotation.............................................
Changing a wheel...................................
Tire Sealing System ...............................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
08 Car care
174
176
178
179
180
182
183
185
186
187
188
189
190
192
197
Washing and cleaning the car................. 202
Paint touch up......................................... 206
06 07 08
6
146
147
148
149
151
152
153
155
157
159
160
162
163
164
168
Contents
09 Maintenance and servicing
Volvo maintenance..................................
Maintaining your car...............................
Hood.......................................................
Engine compartment...............................
Engine oil................................................
Fluids.......................................................
Wiper blades...........................................
Battery.....................................................
Replacing bulbs......................................
Fuses.......................................................
10 Audio
210
212
214
215
216
218
220
221
223
230
Audio functions.......................................
Radio functions.......................................
CD player/CD changer............................
Audio menu.............................................
BluetoothŸ hands-free connection.........
11 Specifications
240
244
249
253
254
Label information....................................
Dimensions and weights.........................
Fuel, oils, and fluids................................
Engine oil................................................
Engine specifications..............................
Electrical system.....................................
Three-way catalytic converter.................
Volvo programs.......................................
09 10 11
262
264
267
269
270
272
274
275
7
Contents
12 Index
Index....................................................... 276
12
8
Contents
9
Introduction
General information
Shiftlock (automatic transmission)
When your car is parked, the gear selector is
locked in the Park (P) position. To release the
selector from this position, turn the ignition key
to position II (or start the engine), depress the
brake pedal, press the button on the front side
of the gear selector and move the selector from
Park (P).
Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine" light) may
indicate a fault.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS system in your car performs a selfdiagnostic test when the vehicle first reaches
the speed of approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several
times and a sound may be audible from the
ABS control module. This is normal.
Fuel filler door
Press the button on the light switch panel when
the car is at a standstill to open the fuel filler
door.
Fuel filler cap
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into place. If this
cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the car is refueled, the Malfunction
10
•
Optional or accessory equipment
described in this manual may not be
available in all countries or markets.
Please note that some vehicles may be
equipped differently, depending on
special legal requirements.
•
Information contained in the balance of the
manual is extremely useful and should be
read after operating the vehicle for the first
time.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication.
•
The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it
should be kept in the vehicle for ready
access.
Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and
without incurring obligation.
•
Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that country's applicable safety and emission
control requirements. In some cases it
may be difficult or impossible to comply
with these requirements. Modifications
to the emission control system(s) may
render your Volvo not certifiable for
legal operation in the U.S., Canada and
other countries.
About this manual
•
Keylock (automatic transmission)
When the ignition is switched off, the gear
selector must be in the Park (P) position before
the key can be removed from the ignition
switch.
NOTE
•
•
Before you operate your vehicle for the first
time, please familiarize yourself with the
new-engine oil consumption information,
see page 216. You should also be familiar
with the information found in the chapters
"Instruments and controls", and "Starting
and driving".
Introduction
General information
WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
unseen damage may affect its driveability
and safety.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
11
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
Volvo is committed to the well being of its customers. As a natural part of this commitment,
we care about the environment in which we all
live. Caring for the environment means an
everyday involvement in reducing our environmental impact. Volvo's environmental activities
are based on a holistic view, which means we
consider the overall environmental impact of a
product throughout its complete life cycle. In
this context, design, production, product use,
and recycling are all important considerations.
In production, Volvo has partly or completely
phased out several chemicals including CFCs,
lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and
reduced the number of chemicals used in our
plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into
production a three-way catalytic converter with
a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen
sensor, in 1976. The current version of this
highly efficient system reduces emissions of
harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the
exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and
the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile
manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for
the air conditioning system of all models as far
back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are
bringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehicles and parts have fulfilled their use, recycling
12
is the next critical step in completing the life
cycle. The metal content is about 75% of the
total weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehicle among the most recycled industrial products. In order to have efficient and wellcontrolled recycling, dismantling information is
available for all Volvo models. For Volvo, all
homogeneous plastic parts weighing more
than 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with international symbols that indicate how the component is to be sorted for recycling. In addition
to continuous environmental refinement of
conventional gasoline-powered internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at
advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on
the environment. To reduce your vehicle's
environmental impact, you can:
•
Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel economy with improperly inflated tires.
•
Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.
•
Drive at a constant speed whenever possible.
•
See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspection if the check engine (malfunction indi-
cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the
vehicle has started.
•
Properly dispose of any vehicle-related
waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc.
•
When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo
car care products are formulated to be
environmentally friendly.
For additional information regarding the environmental activities in which Volvo Cars of
North America, LLC and Volvo Car Corporation
are involved, visit our Internet home page at:
http://www.volvocars.us.
WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as
air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,
adaptive steering columns, and button cell
batteries may contain Perchlorate material.
Special handling may apply for service or
vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Introduction
Important warnings
Information booklet for more warranty
information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that
may result from the installation of nongenuine accessories.
Accessory Installation
•
•
•
•
•
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved
accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician knows where
accessories may and may not be safely
installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please
consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.
Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically
tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
Additionally, an inexperienced installer
may not be familiar with some of your vehicle's systems.
Any of your vehicle's performance and
safety systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo has
not tested, or if you allow accessories to be
installed by someone unfamiliar with your
vehicle.
Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
See your Warranty and Service Records
Driver distraction
•
Driver distraction results from driver activities that are not directly related to controlling the vehicle in the driving environment.
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped
with many feature-rich entertainment and
communication systems. These include
hands-free cellular telephones, navigation
systems, and multipurpose audio systems.
You may also own other portable electronic devices for your own convenience.
When used properly and safely, they enrich
the driving experience. Improperly used,
any of these could cause a distraction.
•
For all of these systems, we want to provide the following warning that reflects the
strong Volvo concern for your safety:
•
Never use these devices or any feature of
your vehicle in a way that distracts you
from the task of driving safely. Distraction
can lead to a serious accident. In addition
to this general warning, we offer the following guidance regarding specific newer
features that may be found in your vehicle:
•
Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit
cellular telephone use by a driver while the
vehicle is moving.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, set and make changes to your
travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.
•
Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your
programmed presets to make radio use
quicker and simpler.
•
Never use portable computers or personal
digital assistants while the vehicle is moving.
A driver has a responsibility to do everything
possible to ensure his or her own safety and
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions
is part of that responsibility.
13
14
16
18
21
26
29
30
31
33
34
36
37
39
41
42
44
45
G020871
Occupant safety......................................................................................
Seat belts................................................................................................
Supplemental Restraint System..............................................................
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS).............................................................
Side impact protection airbags...............................................................
Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)..................................................................
Whiplash Protection System...................................................................
Crash mode.............................................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
Child restraint systems...........................................................................
Infant seats..............................................................................................
Convertible seats....................................................................................
Booster cushions....................................................................................
ISOFIX lower anchors.............................................................................
Top tether anchors..................................................................................
Child restraint registration and recalls....................................................
SAFETY
01
01 Safety
Occupant safety
01
Volvo's concern for safety
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern
dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled
off the production line. Three-point seat belts
(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energyabsorbing impact zones were designed into
Volvo cars long before it was fashionable or
required by government regulation.
We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety
features and to refine those already in our cars.
You can help. We would appreciate hearing
your suggestions about improving automobile
safety. We also want to know if you ever have
a safety concern with your car. Call us in the
U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
1-800-663-8255.
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how
old you are but rather on:
•
•
•
How well you see.
Your ability to concentrate.
How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The following suggestions are intended to help
you cope with the ever changing trafficenvironment.
16
•
•
Never drink and drive.
•
•
•
Take a driver-retraining course.
•
Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
•
Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with
regard to stopping distance.
If you are taking any medication, consult
your physician about its potential effects
on your driving abilities.
Have your eyes checked regularly.
Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo
Cars of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from:
http://www.safercar.gov
Volvo strongly recommends that if your vehicle
is covered under a service campaign, safety or
emission recall or similar action, it should be
completed as soon as possible. Please check
with your local retailer or Volvo Cars of North
America, LLC if your vehicle is covered under
these conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
01 Safety
Occupant safety
01
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars
of Canada Corp.
To contact Transport Canada, call (800)
333-0510, or (613) 993-9851 if you are calling
from the Ottawa region.
17
01 Safety
01
Seat belts
Using seat belts
certain impacts from the rear. The front seat
belts also include a tension reducing device
which, in the event of a collision, limits the peak
forces exerted by the seat belt on the occupant.
Buckling a seat belt
G020104
Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch
plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is
heard. The seat belt retractor is normally
"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided
that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.
Adjusting the seat belt
Seat belts should always be worn by all occupants of your vehicle. Children should be properly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster
seat determined by age, weight and height.
Volvo also believes no child should sit in the
front seat of a vehicle.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory
for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.
The retractor will lock up as follows:
•
•
•
•
18
during braking and acceleration
if the vehicle is leaning excessively
when driving in turns
When wearing the seat belt remember:
•
•
The belt should not be twisted or turned.
•
Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
up into its retractor and that the shoulder
and lap belts are taut.
Seat belt pretensioners
The outboard seat belts are equipped with pretensioners that reduce slack in the belts. These
pretensioners are triggered in situations where
the front or side impact airbags deploy, and in
if the belt is pulled out rapidly
The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the hips (not pressing against
the abdomen).
Unbuckling the seat belt
•
To remove the seat belt, press the red section on the seat belt receptacle. Before
exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt
retracts fully after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt back into the retractor slot.
WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion
of the belt under the arm, behind the back
or otherwise out of position. Such use could
cause injury in the event of an accident. As
seat belts lose much of their strength when
exposed to violent stretching, they should
be replaced after any collision, even if they
appear to be undamaged.
01 Safety
Seat belts
Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.
•
Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point
belt system will have a detrimental
effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a collision.
•
The seat back should not be tilted too
far back. The shoulder belt must be taut
in order to function properly.
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.
steering wheel). Within this context, they
should strive to position the seat with as large
a distance as possible between their belly and
the steering wheel.
Child seats
Please refer to page 36 for information on
securing child seats with the seat belts.
Seat belt reminder
The seat belt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
over the shoulder then be routed between the
breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap
section should lay flat over the thighs and as
low as possible under the belly. It must never
be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack
from the belt and insure that it fits close to the
body without any twists.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means they must
be able to easily operate the foot pedals and
G018084
•
Seat belt use during pregnancy
G020105
WARNING
01
Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console
The seat belt reminder consists of an audible
signal, an indicator light near the rearview mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel that
alert all occupants of the vehicle if their seat
``
19
01 Safety
Seat belts
01
belts are not fastened. These signals will last
for approximately 6 seconds.
Rear seats
The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two
additional functions:
•
It provides information about which seat
belts are fastened in the rear seat. A message will appear in the information display
when a belt is being used or if one of the
rear doors has been opened. This message
will disappear after approximately 30 seconds or can be erased by pressing the
READ button on the left steering wheel
lever.
•
It also provides a reminder if one of the
occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled
his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in
motion. A visual and audible signal will be
given. These signals will stop when the
seat belt has been re-buckled or can be
stopped by pressing the READ button.
The message in the information display can
always be accessed, even if it has been erased,
by pressing the READ button to display stored
messages.
20
Seat belt maintenance
Check periodically that the seat belts are in
good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism
function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull
rapidly on the strap.
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Where applicable, a text message will also be
displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning
properly, the general warning symbol
illuminates and either SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE URGENT or SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.
G026330
WARNING
•
If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
•
Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by
a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
SRS warning light
As an enhancement to the three-point seat
belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS
consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags, side impact airbags, the occupant
weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of
these systems are monitored by the SRS control module. An SRS warning light in the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates
when the ignition key is turned to position I, II,
or III, and will normally go out after approximately 7 seconds if no faults are detected in
the system.
01
WARNING
If your vehicle has been subjected to flood
conditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your
vehicle has become flood-damaged in any
way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or
put the key in the ignition before disconnecting the battery (see below). This may
cause airbag deployment which could result
in personal injury. Have the vehicle towed to
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs.
Automatic transmission
Before attempting to tow the vehicle, use
the following procedure to override the
shiftlock system to move the gear selector
to the neutral position:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery.
2. Wait at least one minute.
3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it
to position II.
4. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
5. Move the gear selector from Park (P) to
the Neutral (N) position, see page 151,
for information on manually overriding
the shiftlock system.
``
21
01 Safety
01
Supplemental Restraint System
The front airbags supplement the three-point
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the
protection intended, seat belts must be worn
at all times.
The front airbag system includes gas generators surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators,
causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen
gas.
G015167
G020111
The front airbag system
Location of the passenger's side front airbag
As the movement of the seats' occupants compresses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled at a controlled rate to provide better
cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also
deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a second.
The location of the front airbags is indicated by
SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel
pad and above the glove compartment, and by
decals on both sun visors and on the front and
far right side of the dash.
22
•
The driver's side front airbag is folded and
located in the steering wheel hub.
•
The passenger's side front airbag is folded
behind a panel located above the glove
compartment.
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
WARNING
•
The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a replacement for-the three-point seat belts. For
maximum protection, wear seat belts at
all times. Be aware that no system can
prevent all possible injuries that may
occur in an accident.
•
Never drive a vehicle with a steering
wheel-mounted airbag with your hands
on the steering wheel pad/airbag housing.
•
•
The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment
occurs very quickly and with considerable force. During normal deployment
and depending on variables such as
seating position, one may experience
abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other
injuries as a result from deployment of
one or both of the airbags.
When installing any accessory equipment, make sure that the front airbag
system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction.
Front airbag deployment
•
The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and
object impacted. The airbags may also
deploy in certain non-frontal collisions
where rapid deceleration occurs.
•
The SRS sensors, which trigger the front
airbags, are designed to react to both the
impact of the collision and the inertial
forces generated by it, and to determine if
the intensity of the collision is sufficient for
the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags
to be deployed.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.
•
If the collision involves a nonrigid object
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed
object at a low speed, the front airbags will
not necessarily deploy.
•
Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the
rear or in a rollover situation.
•
The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.
01
NOTE
•
Deployment of front airbags occurs only
one time during an accident. In a collision where deployment occurs, the airbags and seat belt pretensioners activate. Some noise occurs and a small
amount of powder is released. The
release of the powder may appear as
smoke-like matter. This is a normal
characteristic and does not indicate fire.
•
Volvo's front airbags use special sensors that are integrated with the front
seat buckles. The point at which the airbag deploys is determined by whether
or not the seat belt is being used, as well
as the severity of the collision.
•
Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less
severe, but severe enough to present a
clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is
more severe, the airbags are triggered
at full capacity.
Should you have questions about any component in the SRS system, please contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
or Volvo Customer Support:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
``
23
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
Customer Care Center
P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey
07647-0914
WARNING
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened1.
•
Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair
the steering of your vehicle. Other
safety systems can also be damaged.
•
The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin
and eye irritation in the event of prolonged exposure.
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocanada.com
1
24
See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26.
G032243
01
Airbag decal in the front passenger's door opening
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
G032525
WARNING
•
Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat. Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and
children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of
any vehicle with a passenger-side front
airbag. See page 35 for guidelines.
•
Occupants in the front passenger's seat
must never sit on the edge of the seat,
sit leaning toward the instrument panel
or otherwise sit out of position.
•
The occupant's back must be as upright
as comfort allows and be against the
seat back with the seat belt properly
fastened.
•
Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
the dash, seat or out of the window.
WARNING
•
No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
on, attached to, or installed near the air
bag hatch (the area above the glove
compartment) or the area affected by
airbag deployment.
•
There should be no loose articles, e.g.
coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dashboard area.
•
Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's
side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.
G032934
Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard
01
Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors
25
01 Safety
01
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)
Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
under certain conditions.
The OWS works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly seated occupant and determine if
the passenger's side front airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
inflate).
2
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on
to remind you that the passenger's side front
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead
console, near the base of the rearview mirror.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched on, the OWS
indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds
while the system performs a self-diagnostic
test.
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag when:
G018082
•
•
the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is
installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions,
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint
that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions,
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat,
•
a front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time,
•
a child or a small person occupies the front
passenger's seat.
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults
and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehicle with a passenger's side front airbag, and be
properly restrained. Children should always be
seated in child restraints appropriate for their
size and weight. See also the child safety recommendations on page 34.
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will
26
the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
or has small/medium objects in the front
seat,
However, if a fault is detected in the system:
•
•
The OWS indicator light will stay on
The SRS warning light (see page 21) will
come on and stay on
The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF SERVICE
URGENT will be displayed in the information
display.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)
WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as explained on the preceding page,
be aware that the passenger's side front airbag will not deploy in the event of a collision.
In this case, the SRS system and Occupant
Weight Sensor should be inspected by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
passenger's side front airbag is disabled (see
the following table).
Passenger's
seat occupancy status
OWS indicator light status
Passenger's
side front
airbag status
Seat unoccupied
OWS indicator light
Passenger's
side front
airbag disabled
WARNING
•
•
lights up
Never try to open, remove, or repair any
components in the OWS system. This
could result in system malfunction.
Maintenance or repairs should only be
carried out by an a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could
reduce pressure on the seat cushion,
which might interfere with the OWS system's function.
The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag when a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. The
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will
illuminate and stay on to remind you that the
A
Seat occupied by low
weight
occupant/
objectA
OWS indicator light
Seat occupied by
heavy occupant/object
OWS indicator light
lights up
is
not lit
Passenger's
side front
airbag disabled
Passenger's
side front
airbag enabled
Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do
not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled
unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is
any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag anytime the
01
system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front passenger's seat.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp will be off and remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible
that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens:
1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in an upright position.
2. Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended.
3. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag.
4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains on even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
classification capability. It does not indicate
OWS malfunction.
Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle in
any way to accommodate a disability, for
``
27
01 Safety
01
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)
example by altering or adapting the driver's or
front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at:
WARNING
•
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey
07647-0914
1-800-458-1552
•
The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the
OWS system's function.
•
The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more
pressure on the passenger than normal.
This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and
could result in the airbag being enabled,
which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario
M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
28
No objects that add to the total weight
on the seat should be placed on the
front passenger's seat. If a child is
seated in the front passenger's seat
with any additional weight, this extra
weight could cause the OWS system to
enable the airbag, which might cause it
to deploy in the event of a collision,
thereby injuring the child.
WARNING
Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow
these instructions could adversely affect the
system's function and result in serious injury
to the occupant of the front passenger's
seat:
•
The full weight of the front seat passenger should always be on the seat cushion. The passenger should never lift
him/herself off the seat cushion using
the armrest in the door or the center
console, by pressing the feet on the
floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat
cushion, or by pressing against the
backrest in a way that reduces pressure
on the seat cushion. This could cause
OWS to disable the passenger's side
front airbag.
•
Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way
that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
occurs between the object and the front
seat, other than as a direct result of the
correct use of the Automatic Locking
Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt, see page 35.
•
No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.
01 Safety
Side impact protection airbags
WARNING
SIPS airbag deployment
Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag
As an enhancement to the structural side
impact protection built into your car, the car is
also equipped with Side Impact Protection
System (SIPS) airbags.
The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of
certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
•
The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point seat
belt system. It is not designed to deploy
during collisions from the front or rear of
the car or in rollover situations.
•
The use of seat covers on the front seats
may impede SIPS airbag deployment.
•
No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to
or installed near the SIPS airbag system
or in the area affected by SIPS airbag
deployment.
•
Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
•
In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.
G025315
G020118
Side impact airbags – front seats only
01
NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by
the impact. The airbags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
Components in the SIPS airbag system
This SIPS airbag system consists of gas generators and side airbag modules built into the
outboard sides of both front seat backrests.
29
01 Safety
01
Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)
The Volvo Inflatable Curtain system
NOTE
If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains
inflated for approximately 3 seconds.
WARNING
The VIC system is a supplement to the
Side Impact Protection System. It is not
designed to deploy during collisions
from the front or rear of the car or in rollover situations.
•
Never try to open or repair any components of the VIC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
•
Never hang heavy items from the ceiling
handles. This could impede deployment
of the Inflatable curtain.
G019985
•
This system consists of inflatable curtains
located along the sides of the roof liners,
stretching from the center of both front side
windows to the rear edge of the rear side door
windows. It is designed to help protect the
heads of the occupants of the front seats and
the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions.
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (VIC) and the Side Impact Airbag System
(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The VIC and the SIPS
airbag deploy simultaneously.
30
WARNING
In order for the VIC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and both
outboard rear seat occupants should sit in
an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and
children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats.
Children must never be allowed in the front
passenger's seat, see page 35 for guidelines. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an
accident.
01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System
01
G020347
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only
The WHIPS system consists of specially
designed hinges and brackets on the front seat
backrests designed to help absorb some of the
energy generated in a collision from the rear
(when the vehicle is "rearended").
In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges
and brackets of the front seat backrests are
designed to change position slightly to allow
the backrest/head restraint to help support the
occupant's head before moving slightly rearward. This movement helps absorb some of
the forces that could result in whiplash.
WARNING
•
•
The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in
your car. For this system to function
properly, the three-point seat belt must
be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that
may occur in an accident.
The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear,
depending on the crash severity, angle
and speed.
WARNING
•
Occupants in the front seats must never
sit out of position. The occupant's back
must be as upright as comfort allows
and be against the seat back with the
seat belt properly fastened.
•
If your car has been involved in a rearend collision, the front seat backrests
must be inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician, even
if the seats appear to be undamaged.
``
31
01 Safety
01
Whiplash Protection System
Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced.
Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself.
G020125
•
G020126
WARNING
WARNING
Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat could impede
the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear
seat is folded down, the occupied front
seats must be adjusted forward so that they
do not touch the folded rear seat.
32
•
Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind
the front seats could impede the function of the WHIPS system.
•
If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the
front seat backrests in the event of a
collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system.
01 Safety
Crash mode
Driving after a collision
fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, the brake system, etc.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair the vehicle
yourself or to reset the electrical system
after the vehicle has displayed CRASH
MODE SEE MANUAL. This could
result in injury or improper system function.
•
Restoring the vehicle to normal operating mode should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
G026363
•
•
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,
the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may
appear in the information display. This indicates that the vehicle's functionality has been
reduced.
This text can only be shown if the display is
undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system
is intact.
CRASH MODE is a feature that is triggered if
one or more of the safety systems (for example,
front or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, or
one or more of the seat belt pretensioners) has
deployed. The collision may have damaged an
important function in the vehicle, such as the
After CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL
has been displayed, if you detect the
odor of fuel vapor, or see any signs of
fuel leakage, do not attempt to start the
vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.
01
3. Try to start the vehicle.
Moving the vehicle
If the electrical system is able to reset system
status to normal (CRASH MODE SEE
MANUAL will no longer be displayed), the
vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position, if for example, it is blocking traffic.
It should, however, not be moved farther than
is absolutely necessary.
WARNING
Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable
after CRASH MODE has been set, it should
not be driven or towed (pulled by another
vehicle). There may be concealed damage
that could make it difficult or impossible to
control. The vehicle should be transported
on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/
repairs.
Attempting to start the vehicle
If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is
no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the
vehicle. To do so:
1. Remove the ignition key or optional keyless
drive start control, see page 146.
2. Reinsert the key or start control in the ignition switch. The vehicle will then attempt to
reset CRASH MODE to normal mode.
33
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Children should be seated safely
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in a
car.
Your car is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH
attachments, which make it more convenient
to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
Such child restraint systems can help protect
children in cars in the event of an accident only
if they are used properly. However, children
could be endangered in a crash if the child
restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to follow the installation instructions
for your child restraint can result in your child
striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an
accident, a child held in a person's arms can
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and
an unrestrained person. The child could also be
injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver
or impact. The same can also happen if the
infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.
Other occupants should also be properly
34
restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring
or increasing the injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a car. Find out the regulations existing
in your state or province. Recent accident statistics have shown that children are safer in rear
seating positions than front seating positions
when properly restrained. A child restraint system can help protect a child in a vehicle. Here's
what to look for when selecting a child restraint
system:
•
It should have a label certifying that it
meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, CMVSS 213.
•
Make sure the child restraint system is
approved for the child's height, weight and
development – the label required by the
standard or regulation, or instructions for
infant restraints, typically provide this information.
•
In using any child restraint system, we urge
you to carefully look over the instructions
that are provided with the restraint. Be sure
you understand them and can use the
device properly and safely in this vehicle.
A misused child restraint system can result
in increased injuries for both the infant or
child and other occupants in the vehicle.
When a child has outgrown the child safety
seat, you should use the rear seat with the
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to
help protect the child here is to place the child
on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly
located on the hips (see the illustration on page
41). Legislation in your state or province may
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
combination with the seat belt, depending on
the child's age and/or size. Please check local
regulations.
A specially designed and tested booster cushion (not available in Canada) can be obtained
from your Volvo retailer for children weighing
33 – 80 lb. (15 – 36 kg) and 38-54 inches
(97 – 137 cm) in height.
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend that
children under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in
height who have outgrown these devices sit
in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened.
01 Safety
Child safety
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
To make child seat installation easier, each
seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep the
seat belt taut.
When attaching the seat belt to a child
seat:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
according to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the
buckle (lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around
the child seat.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible at this time and is normal. The belt will
now be locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is
unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.
Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend that
children who have outgrown these devices
sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly
fastened.
•
Volvo strongly recommends that everyone
in the vehicle be properly restrained.
•
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.
•
Drive safely!
Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit
in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really.
A front airbag is a very powerful device
designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
01
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
of inflation, a child should never be placed in
the front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo
has been an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue to do our
part. But we need your help. Please remember
to put your children in the back seat, and
buckle them up.
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:
•
•
Always wear your seat belt.
Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a threepoint seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
35
01 Safety
01
Child restraint systems
Child restraints
WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information
on securing the restraint.
G026503
G026491
WARNING
Convertible seat
Infant seat
There are three main types of child restraint
systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and
booster cushions. They are classified according to the child's age and size.
The following section provides general information on securing a child restraint using a
three-point seat belt. Refer to pages 42–
44 for information on securing a child restraint
using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether
anchorages.
36
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
Passenger airbag off symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this position.
•
When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the
passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or collision.
•
A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.
01 Safety
Infant seats
Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat
NOTE
Refer to pages 42–44 for information on
securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower
anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
WARNING
•
An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
•
The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.
G026492
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
G026493
G026417
Securing an infant seat with a seat belt
01
Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Fasten the seat belt
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
Passenger airbag off symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this position.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
``
37
01 Safety
01
Infant seats
G026498
G026494
and is normal. The seat belt should now be
locked in place.
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
WARNING
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the
seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic
locking function will be audible at this time
38
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any
direction.
6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure that
it is held securely in place by the seat belt.
7. The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
01 Safety
Convertible seats
Securing a convertible seat with a seat
belt
WARNING
01
WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the
convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations.
A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck is
still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained,
facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward
facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.
G026420
WARNING
NOTE
Refer to pages 42–44 for information on
securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower
anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
G026503
Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat
•
Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only.
•
A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
unless there is adequate space for safe
installation.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.
``
39
01 Safety
01
Convertible seats
NOTE
WARNING
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
The convertible seat can be removed by
unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
completely.
G026500
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,
let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this
time and is normal. The seat belt should
now be locked in place.
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any
direction.
Fasten the seat belt
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
G026502
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
G026501
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
6. Push and pull the convertible seat to
ensure that it is held securely in place by
the seat belt.
40
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
01 Safety
Booster cushions
Securing a booster cushion
01
Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions.
G026489
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
fits snugly around the child.
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion
and fasten the seat belt
WARNING
•
The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.
•
The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across
the chest and shoulder.
•
The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the
arm.
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
Passenger airbag off symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this position.
41
01 Safety
ISOFIX lower anchors
Using the ISOFIX lower child seat
anchors
3. Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX lower
anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE
The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX lower anchors.
When installing a child restraint in this
position, attach the restraint's top tether
strap (if it is so equipped) to the top
tether anchorage point (see page 44)
and secure the restraint with the vehicle's center seat belt (see page 36).
•
Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use
both ISOFIX lower anchors and top
tethers whenever possible.
G015268
•
ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors
Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped child
seats are located in the rear, outboard seats,
hidden below the backrest cushions. Symbols
on the seat back upholstery mark the anchor
positions (see the illustration).
WARNING
•
The ISOFIX lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with
child seats positioned in the outboard
seating positions. These anchors are
not certified for use with any child
restraint that is positioned in the center
seating position. When securing a child
restraint in the center seating position,
use only the vehicle's center seat belt.
G031682
01
To access the anchors:
1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors by
feel.
42
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX
lower anchors
01 Safety
ISOFIX lower anchors
01
WARNING
Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly
to the anchor (see the illustration). If the
attachment is not correctly fastened, the
child restraint may not be properly secured
in the event of a collision.
43
01 Safety
01
Top tether anchors
Top tether anchors
See page 42 for information on securing the
child restraint to ISOFIX lower anchors.
•
Never route a top tether strap over the
top or around the head restraint. It
should always be routed under the head
restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts or harnesses. The
anchorages are not able to withstand
excessive forces on them in the event of
collision if full harness seat belts or adult
seat belts are installed to them. An adult
who uses a belt anchored in a child
restraint anchorage runs a great risk of
suffering severe injuries should a collision occur.
•
Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or
interfere with the proper use of the top
tether strap.
G026487
G029703
WARNING
Route the strap under the head restraint
Top tether anchorage points
Volvo vehicles are equipped with child restraint
top tether anchorages in the rear seating positions. They are located on the rear sides of the
backrests.
WARNING
Be sure to fasten the child tether attachment
correctly to the anchor. If it is not correctly
fastened, the child seat may not be properly
restrained in the event of a collision.
Using the top tether anchorages
1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2. Attach the hook to the anchorage.
3. Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and fasten its attachment to the
anchorage.
4. Firmly tension the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Tension the top tether strap
only after the lower anchor straps or the
seat belt have been firmly tensioned.
44
01 Safety
Child restraint registration and recalls
01
Registering a child restraint
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
reasons. You must register your child restraint
to be reached in a recall. To stay informed
about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out
and return the registration card that comes
with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall
information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.
In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child
Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.
45
46
48
51
53
55
58
60
61
64
66
68
70
73
74
75
77
80
82
85
G020901
Instrument overview................................................................................
Instrument panel.....................................................................................
Indicator and warning symbols...............................................................
Symbols – instrument panel....................................................................
Information display..................................................................................
12-volt sockets........................................................................................
Lighting panel..........................................................................................
Left-side steering wheel lever.................................................................
Trip computer..........................................................................................
Cruise control (option).............................................................................
Right-side steering wheel lever...............................................................
Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers.............................
Parking brake..........................................................................................
Power windows.......................................................................................
Mirrors.....................................................................................................
Power moonroof (option)........................................................................
Personal settings.....................................................................................
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option).......................................
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
02
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
G019488
02
48
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
Steering wheel adjustment
Not in use
Parking brake
Hood opener
Not is use
12-volt socket
Controls in front doors (see
page 50)
Courtesy lighting switch
Position for optional equipment
Driver's side reading light
Position for optional equipment
02
Left steering wheel lever
Passenger's side reading light
Lighting panel, fuel filler door
opener
Door open handle and locking button
Climate system air vent
Side window air vent
Seat belt reminder and Occupant
Weight Sensor indicator
Rear-view mirror
Display for climate control, personal
settings, and audio system
Audio system
Cruise control
Horn, airbag
Controls for personal settings and
audio system
Main instrument panel
Controls for climate system
Audio controls (option)
Gear selector
Right steering wheel lever
Hazard warning flashers
Ignition switch
Door open handle, and locking button
Moonroof control (option)
Glove compartment
``
49
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
Control panel in driver's door
G017435
02
Lockout switch for rear windows
Power windows
Door mirror button, driver's side
Door mirror adjustment control
Door mirror button, passenger's
side
50
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
Instrument panel
2
9
10
3
4
11
5
12
6
02
7
13
G031465
8
1
14
Turn signal, left
the temperature readings may be slightly
higher than the actual ambient temperature.
sively high engines speeds. This will be
noticeable as a pronounced unevenness in
engine speed.
Warning symbol – See the following pages
for additional information.
Information symbol – See the following
pages for additional information.
Indicator and warning symbols
Information display – The display presents
information and warning messages, the
ambient temperature, clock, etc. When the
ambient temperature is between 23 °F and
36 °F (–5 °C and +2 °C), a snowflake symbol is shown in the display. This symbol
serves as a warning for possible slippery
road surfaces. Please note that this symbol
does not indicate a fault with your car. At
low speeds, or when the car is not moving,
Turn signal, right
Speedometer
Tachometer – Shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not drive continuously with the needle
in the red area of the dial, which indicates
maximum allowable engine rpm range.
Instead, shift to a higher gear or slow the
vehicle down. The engine management
system will automatically prevent exces-
Fuel gauge, see page 267 for fuel tank volume. When a warning light in the gauge
comes on, the vehicle should be refueled
as soon as possible. see page 66 for
more information on fuel level and consumption in the "Trip computer” section.
High beam indicator
Function display – This window displays
information on functions such as the
``
51
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
odometer, trip odometers, optional rain
sensor, and cruise control.
02
Trip odometer reset button – The trip
odometers are used to measure short distances. Press the button briefly to switch
between the odometer for the car's total
mileage and the two trip odometers, T1
and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds)
resets the currently selected trip odometer.
Temperature gauge – The gauge indicates
the temperature of the engine cooling system. If the temperature is abnormally high
and the needle enters the red zone, a message is shown in the display. Bear in mind
that auxiliary lamps in front of the air intake
reduce the cooling capacity at high outside
temperatures and high engine loads.
Indicator and warning symbols
52
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
Function check
The indicator and warning symbols1 light up
when you turn the ignition key or the optional
keyless drive start control to the driving position (position II) before starting. This shows that
the symbols are functioning.
Symbols in the center of the instrument
panel
02
3. Follow the instructions provided, or contact a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician. Erase the message by pressing
READ, see page 58.
When the engine starts, all symbols go out. If the engine is not
started within 5 seconds, all of the
symbols except the malfunction
indicator light (CHECK ENGINE)
and the oil pressure warning light
will go out. Certain symbols may
not have their functions illustrated, depending
on the car's equipment.
G026365
Information symbol
Warning symbol
The red warning symbol lights up
to indicate a fault that could affect
the car's drivability.This symbol
illuminates when the vehicle is
traveling at speeds above 5 mph
(7 km/h). A text explaining the nature of the fault
will also be shown in the information display.
The symbol and accompanying text will remain
on until the fault has been corrected. This symbol may also light up in combination with other
indicator or warning symbols.
1
1. Stop the car as soon as possible in a suitable location.
2. Read the message in the information display.
CHECK
ENGINE
The PARK BRAKE symbol will not go out until
the parking brake has been released.
If the red warning symbol lights up:
The yellow information symbol
lights up to alert the driver to a
message in the information display. This symbol illuminates when
the vehicle is traveling at speeds
below 5 mph (7 km/h).
The message can be erased by pressing the
READ button, see page 58, or will disappear
automatically (the length of time required for
the message to disappear varies, depending
on the function indicated).
When the message "TIME FOR REGULAR
SERVICE" is displayed, the text can be erased
and the information symbol light can be turned
off by pressing the READ button. The text will
disappear and the symbol light will go out automatically after two minutes.
On certain engines, the symbol for low oilpressure is not used. Instead, a text warningis provided in the information display, see page 216.
``
53
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
This symbol may also light up in combination
with other indicator or warning symbols.
02
NOTE
The car can still be driven after the information symbol has come on. The car can be
driven for 1–2 weeks after service-related
information has been displayed.
54
02 Instruments and controls
Symbols – instrument panel
Symbols – left side
in your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected
condition could hurt fuel economy, emission
controls, and drivability. Extended driving without correcting the cause could even damage
other components in your car.
NOTE
Canadian models are equipped with the
second symbol.
G026439
2. Anti-lock Brake system (ABS)
1. Malfunction indicator light
CHECK
ENGINE
As you drive, a computer called
On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII)
monitors your car's engine, transmission, electrical and emission
systems.
The CHECK ENGINE light will light
up if the computer senses a condition that
potentially may need correcting. When this
happens, please have your car checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a malfunction of the ABS system
(the standard braking system will
still function).
The vehicle should be driven to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for inspection, see page 153 for additional information.
4. Stability system STC or DSTC
This indicator symbol flashes when
the STC (Stability and Traction
control system) or the DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction
control system) is actively working
to stabilize the car, see page 155 for more
detailed information.
02
5. Tire Pressure Monitoring System
This system monitors inflation
pressure in the tires. See page
197 for more information.
6. Fuel level warning light
When this light comes on, the vehicle should be refueled as soon as
possible.
NOTE
Canadian models are equipped with the
second symbol.
3. Rear fog light
This symbol indicates that the rear
fog light (located in the driver's
side taillight cluster) is on.
A CHECK ENGINE light may have many causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a change
``
55
02 Instruments and controls
Symbols – instrument panel
Symbols – right side
2. Parking brake applied
This light is on when the parking
brake (hand brake) is applied. The
parking brake lever is situated
between the front seats, see
page 74 for more information.
02
4. Oil pressure warning light1
If the light comes on while driving,
the car, stop the engine immediately, and check the engine oil
level. If the oil level is normal and
the light stays on after restart, have
the car towed to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo service technician. After hard driving, the light may come on occasionally when
the engine is idling. This is normal, provided it
goes off when the engine speed is increased.
G026438
NOTE
Canadian models are equipped with the
second symbol.
3. SRS system warning light
1. Turn signal indicator for trailer (certain
markets only)
If you are towing a trailer, this light
will flash simultaneously with the
turn signals on the trailer. If the
light does not flash when signaling,
one of the turn signals on the trailer
or on the car are not functioning properly.
1
56
If this light comes on while the car
is being driven, or remains on for
longer than approximately 10 seconds after the car has been
started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions have detected a fault in a seat
belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side
impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.
Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
5. Seat belt reminder
This symbol (and the seat belt
reminder light above the rear view
mirror) will light up if either front
seat occupant has not buckled his/
her seat belt. If the car is not moving, the symbols will go out after approximately
6 seconds.
6. Generator warning light
If the light comes on while the
engine is running, have the charging system checked by an authorized Volvo workshop.
On certain engines, this symbol is not used to indicate low oil pressure. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see also page 216.
02 Instruments and controls
Symbols – instrument panel
7. Brake failure warning light
In this case:
At higher speeds
If this light comes on while driving
or braking, stop the car as quickly
as possible in a safe place, open
the hood, and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir, see
page 215 for the location of the reservoir.
1. Stop the car in a suitable place and switch
off the engine.
If the car is moving at a speed
above approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), the Warning symbol in
the instrument panel will light up
and a message will be shown in the
information display indicating which door(s),
etc is not completely closed.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If both warning lights go off, no further
action is required and the car can be
driven.
4. If both lights remain on after the engine has
been restarted, switch off the engine again
and check the brake fluid level, see
page 215 for the location of the reservoir.
Hood and tailgate
If the hood and/or tailgate is not
completely closed, the Information
symbol in the instrument panel will
light up and a message will be displayed, regardless of the vehicle's
NOTE
Canadian models are equipped with the
second symbol.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir or if a Brake failure – Service
urgent message is displayed in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the
car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake system inspected.
Door open warning
The driver will be alerted if one of the doors, the
hood or the tailgate are open or ajar.
02
speed.
At low speeds
If the car is moving at a speed of
less than approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), the Information symbol in
the instrument panel will light up
and a message will be shown in the
information display indicating which door(s),
etc is not completely closed.
If the BRAKES and ABS warning lights come
on at the same time, this could indicate a fault
in the brake system.
57
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
Messages
NOTE
If a message is displayed when e.g. you are
using the trip computer, this message must
be read before you can access the trip computer.
G019617
02
When an indicator or warning light in the instrument panel comes on, a message is also
shown in the information display. To read a
message:
1. Press the READ button (1).
Message
Meaning
STOP SAFELYA
Stop the vehicle in a
safe place and switch
off the engine to help
prevent the risk of serious damage.
HIGH ENGINE
TEMP STOP
SAFELY
Stop the vehicle in a
safe place and switch
off the engine to help
prevent the risk of serious damage.
SERVICE
URGENTA
Take your car to a
trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for inspection
immediately.
2. Pressing READ repeatedly enables you to
scroll to any other messages that may be
stored.
SEE MANUALA
58
Refer to your owner's
manual. For additional
information, please
contact your Volvo
retailer.
Message
Meaning
SERVICE
REQUIREDA
Take your car to a
trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for inspection as
soon as possible (but
preferably before the
next scheduled maintenance service).
BOOK TIME
FOR SERVICE
Book time for service at
an authorized Volvo
workshop.
TIME FOR
REGULAR
MAINTENANCE
This message is affected by the number of
miles/km driven, by the
number of months, or
by the number of engine
hours since the service
reminder was reset at
the most recent regularly scheduled service.
MAINTENANCE OVERDUE
If the vehicle is not serviced according to
schedule, the warranty
may not apply to damaged parts, etc.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
A
Message
Meaning
TIME FOR
REGULAR
MAINTENANCE
This message is affected by the number of
miles/km driven, by the
number of months, or
by the number of engine
hours since the service
reminder was reset at
the most recent regularly scheduled service.
REMINDER
CHECK OIL
LEVEL
Stop as soon as possible and switch off the
engine, check the oil
level and top up if necessary, see page 216.
02
This is part of the message. Additional information will also
be displayed.
59
02 Instruments and controls
12-volt sockets
12-volt socket (front seat)
NOTE
NOTE
The cover should be kept on when the auxiliary socket is not in use.
02
Auxiliary equipment
The buttons to the left of the 12-volt socket can
be used for Volvo-installed optional or auxiliary
equipment.
G026349
12-volt socket (rear seat)
12-volt socket, auxiliary equipment
The 12-volt socket can be used to plug in certain accessories such as cellular telephones,
etc. The maximum current is 10 A. The key
must be in position I (or higher) for the auxiliary
socket to function.
The auxiliary socket can also be used for a cigarette lighter1, and ashtrays, which can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
1
60
Accessory.
G029082
Ashtrays/cigarette lighter
The 12-volt socket in the rear seat cannot
function as a cigarette lighter.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
Parking lights
Active Bi-Xenon Lights (ABL)–option
The front and rear parking lights can be turned
on even when the ignition is switched off.
±
02
Turn switch (1) to the parking light position.
The license plate lights also illuminate when the
parking lights are switched on.
Headlights
Pos.
Lighting
Daytime running lights off. High
beam flash only.
2. The low beam headlights (daytime running
lights) illuminate automatically, except
when the light switch (1) is in the parking
light position1.
NOTE
See page 64 for information on switching
between high and low beams.
Parking lights
Daytime running lights. High
beams and high beam flash can
be used in this position.
1
G026507
G026415
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
Lighting panel, vehicles with Active Bi-XenonŸ
headlights
When the ABL function is activated, the headlight beams adjust laterally to help light up a
curve according to movements of the steering
wheel.
This function can be activated by turning the
lighting switch to the ABL position (indicated
by the arrow in the illustration). The indicator
in the ABL symbol will illuminate.
light
The function can be deactivated by turning the
lighting switch counterclockwise to one of the
other lighting positions.
On Canadian models, the daytime running lights will remain on with the light switch in this position.
``
61
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
Brake lights
The brake lights come on automatically when
the brakes are applied.
02
Fog lights
Front fog lights (option)
The front fog lights can be used in combination
with either the headlights or the parking lights.
G020789
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
Headlight pattern with ABL deactivated (left) and
activated (right)
2. Press button (3) to turn on the front fog
lights.
An indicator light in the button illuminates when
the front fog lights are on.
Rear fog light
NOTE
•
•
This function can only be activated in
twilight or dark conditions, and only
when the vehicle is in motion.
If the indicator light flashes, this indicates a fault in the ABL system. A text
message will also be displayed.
The single rear fog light is located in the driver's
side taillight cluster.
The rear fog light will only function in combination with the high/low beam headlights or the
optional front fog lights.
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Press button (5) to turn on the rear fog light.
An indicator light in the button illuminates when
the rear fog light is on.
62
NOTE
The rear fog light is considerably brighter
than the normal taillights and should be
used only when conditions such as fog, rain,
snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for
other vehicles to less than 500 ft.
(150 meters).
Instrument panel lighting
The instrument panel lighting illuminates when
the ignition is in position II and the light switch
(1) is in either position
or
.
NOTE
To make it easier to read the odometer, trip
odometer, clock, and ambient temperature,
these gauges illuminate when the vehicle is
unlocked and when the key has been
removed from the ignition switch. The lighting will go out when the vehicle is locked.
Move the thumb wheel (2) up to increase
brightness or down to decrease brightness.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
Unlocking the fuel filler door
With the ignition switched off, press button (4)
to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that
the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the
car begins to move forward.
02
An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler
door re-locks.
63
02 Instruments and controls
Left-side steering wheel lever
Lever positions
02
Turn signals
High/low beam headlights
When turning
Continuous high beams
±
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
Move the lever as far up or down as possible (to position 2) to start the turn signals.
The turn signals will be cancelled automatically
by the movement of the steering wheel, or the
lever can be returned to its initial position by
hand.
When changing lanes
G026954
The driver can automatically flash the turn signals 3 times by:
Turn signals, lane change position
•
Moving the turn signal lever up or down to
position 1 and releasing it.
•
Moving the lever up or down to position 2
and immediately back to its original position.
Turn signals, position for normal turns
High beam flash
Toggle between high and low beams,
Home Safe lighting
1
64
Factory setting
2. With the light switch (1) in position
,
see page 61, pull the turn signal lever
toward the steering wheel (position 4) to
toggle between high and low beams.
High beam flash
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Pull the turn signal lever to position 3. The
high beams will remain on until the lever is
released.
Home safe lighting
When you leave your car at night, you can
make use of the home safe lighting function to
illuminate the area in front of the car.
NOTE
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
•
This automatic flashing sequence can
be interrupted by immediately moving
the lever in the opposite direction.
2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far as
possible towards the steering wheel (to
position 4) and release it.
•
If the turn signal indicator flashes faster
than normal, check for a burned-out
turn signal bulb.
3. Exit the car and lock the doors.
The headlights and parking lights will illuminate
and remain on for 301, 60 or 90 seconds. The
time interval can be changed according to your
02 Instruments and controls
Left-side steering wheel lever
preferences by using the Personal Settings
function, see page 82 for more information.
02
65
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
• ACTUAL SPEED (current speed in mph,
Canadian models only)
02
• STC/DSTC, see page 155
NOTE
G029052
Warning messages from the car's monitoring systems will override the trip computer
function.
READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/
erase a message)
Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip
computer menus)
RESET
The trip computer stores information gathered
from several systems in your car and has four
menus (five on Canadian models) that can be
shown in the information display.
• MILES TO EMPTY TANK
• AVERAGE (average fuel consumption)
• INSTANTANEOUS (current fuel consumption)
• AVERAGE SPEED
66
If a warning message is shown in the information display while you are using the trip computer:
1. Acknowledge the message by pressing the
READ (button 1).
2. Press READ again to return to the trip
computer function.
Controls
The trip computer functions can be accessed
by twisting the thumb wheel (2) one step at a
time in either direction. Twisting a final time
returns you to the original function.
Resetting
AVERAGE (average fuel consumption) and
AVERAGE SPEED can be reset.
1. Select one of these functions.
2. Press RESET (3).
MILES TO EMPTY TANK
This function shows the approximate distance
that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the
tank. The calculation is based on average fuel
consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)
of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank when the reading was taken.
When the message ---- miles to empty tank
appears in the display, refuel as soon as possible.
AVERAGE
This value indicates fuel consumption since the
last time the trip computer was reset, by pressing RESET (button 3). When the engine is
switched off, information on fuel consumption
is stored and remains in system memory until
RESET (button 3) is pressed again.
INSTANTANEOUS
This value indicates the current fuel consumption, based on readings taken once per second. When the car is not moving, "----" will be
displayed.
AVERAGE SPEED
This value indicates average speed since the
last time the trip computer was reset, by pressing RESET (button 3). When the engine is
switched off, information on average speed is
stored and remains in system memory until the
RESET (button 3) is pressed again.
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
ACTUAL SPEED (Canadian models only)
This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed
from km/h to mph.
02
NOTE
Trip computer readings may vary slightly
depending on the circumference of the tires
on the car, tire inflation, or driving style.
67
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control (option)
Engaging the cruise control function
Increasing or decreasing speed
NOTE
The cruise control buttons are located on the
left side of the steering wheel hub.
NOTE
This does not set the vehicle's speed.
1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE will
appear in the function display in the center
of the instrument panel.
2. Press + or – to set the current speed.
CRUISE ON will be displayed.
68
G031667
G020141
02
Use + or – in the following ways to increase or
decrease the vehicle's speed:
1. Press and hold down + or – until the vehicle
reaches the desired speed. This will
become the set speed when the button is
released.
2. Press + or – for approximately a half second and release the button to increase or
decrease vehicle speed by approximately
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
•
Cruise control will not function at
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).
•
Momentary acceleration, for less than
1 minute (e.g. when passing another
car), does not affect cruise control operation. The car will automatically return
to the previously set speed when the
accelerator pedal is released.
Temporarily disengaging the cruise
control
•
Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruise
control.
CRUISE will appear in the function display.
The currently set speed is stored in the system's memory.
Cruise control is also automatically
disengaged:
•
If the speed drops below approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) when driving uphill.
•
When the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed.
•
If the gear selector is moved to position N.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control (option)
•
•
During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.
If the vehicle's speed is increased by using
the accelerator pedal for more than 1
minute.
02
Returning to the set speed
Press the button to resume the
previously set speed. CRUISE
ON will be displayed.
Disengaging cruise control
Cruise control can also be disengaged by:
•
Pressing the CRUISE button (CRUISE
ON will no longer be shown in the function
display).
•
Putting the gear selector in Neutral (N).
WARNING
Cruise control should not be used in heavy
traffic or when driving on wet or slippery
roads. Cruise control may not maintain set
speed on steep downgrades.
69
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
Windshield wipers
Manual wiper function
From position 0, move the lever
upward. The windshield wipers will
sweep one stroke at a time for as
long as the lever is held up.
02
B
D
C
0
Intermittent wiper function
A
With the lever in this position, you
can set the wiper interval by moving the thumb wheel (C) upward to
increase wiper speed or downward to decrease the speed.
G025411
0
Windshield/headlight washers
Continuous wiper function
The wipers operate at "normal"
speed.
High speed wiper function.
Rain sensor (option) – on/of, see page 70
Thumb wheel
Tailgate wiper/washer
Windshield wipers off
The windshield wipers are off when
the lever is in position 0.
CAUTION
•
Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
in operation.
•
Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the windshield/rear window. Be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen in place.
Headlight washers (certain models)
When the lever has been pulled, high pressure
jets mounted in the bumper will spray the headlights.
The following applies to conserve washer fluid,
see page 61 for information on the light switch
positions:
A–Windshield washers
Low/high beam headlights on
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel and
release it. The wipers will make 2–3 sweeps
across the windshield after the lever has been
released.
The headlights will be washed the first time the
windshield is washed. Thereafter, the headlights will only be washed once for every five
times the windshield is washed within a 10minute period.
Parking lights on
Optional Bi-XenonŸ headlights will be washed
once for every five times the windshield is
washed.
Normal halogen headlights will not be washed.
70
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
B – Rain sensor (option)
3. Press button B (see page 70). The rain sensor symbol will appear in the lower display.
Manual deactivation
The rain sensor can be deactivated by:
•
Pressing button (B).
or
•
Moving the windshield wiper lever down.
NOTE
G026422
The rain sensor function will remain activated if the lever is briefly moved up to
activate the "manual sweep" function.
CAUTION
The rain sensor regulates windshield wiper
speed according to the amount of water on the
windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor is
adjusted by moving the thumb wheel (C in the
illustration on the previous page) up (the wipers
will sweep the windshield more frequently) or
down (the wipers will sweep the windshield
less frequently).
Automatic deactivation
On/Off
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
the following situations:
Activating the rain sensor
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Put the windshield wiper lever in position
0.
The rain sensor should be deactivated when
washing the car in an automatic car wash,
etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the
wipers will start inadvertently in the car
wash and could be damaged.
•
•
C – Thumb wheel
The thumb wheel is used to set the wiper interval when intermittent wiping is selected, or the
sensitivity to the amount of rain on the windshield when the rain sensor is selected. Move
the wheel upward or downward to increase/
decrease wiper speed when the intermittent
function is selected, or to increase/decrease
the optional rain sensor's sensitivity when the
this function is activated.
02
D – Tailgate wiper/washer
Press the lever forward to wipe and wash the
tailgate window. The wiper will sweep the window several times after the lever has been
released.
The button at the end of the lever has three
positions:
•
Intermittent wiping: Press in the upper section of the button.
•
Normal wiper speed: Press in the lower
section of the button.
•
Neutral position: The wiper function is
switched off.
When the key is removed from the ignition.
Five minutes after the ignition is switched
off if the key is left in the ignition.
``
71
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
Tailgate wiper and reverse gear
02
72
•
If the front wipers are on and the transmission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate
wiper will be activated.
•
If the transmission is in reverse and the
manual windshield wiper function is used
(the lever is pushed upward), the tailgate
wiper will also be activated for as long the
lever is held up.
•
If the tailgate wiper is already in normal
wiping function, the normal wiping function
will continue.
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers
Steering wheel adjustment
Check that the steering wheel is locked in the
new position.
NOTE
•
Regulations regarding the use of the
hazard warning flasher may vary,
depending on where you live.
•
The hazard warning flashers will be activated automatically if an airbag
deploys.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
02
G020143
Hazard warning flashers
1. Pull down the lever on the steering column
to release the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to a suitable
position
3. Press the lever back into place to lock the
steering wheel in the new position. If necessary, press the steering wheel slightly
while pressing the lever into the locked
position.
G020144
Both the height and the reach of the steering
wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position for the driver.
The four-way flasher should be used to indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic hazard. To activate the flashers, press the triangular button in the center dash. Press the button
again to turn off the flashers.
73
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake
Parking brake (hand brake)
4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever
must be pulled more firmly.
02
5. When parking a vehicle always put the gear
selector in first gear (for manual transmission) or P (for automatic transmission).
G026348
Parking on a hill
•
If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
wheels so that they point away from the
curb.
•
If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
Releasing the parking brake
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
The parking brake lever is located between the
front seats.
2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button
at the end of the lever and lower the lever
completely.
NOTE
The indicator light will illuminate even if the
parking brake has only been partially
applied.
When applying the parking brake
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up firmly to its
full extent.
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
the vehicle is at a standstill.
74
WARNING
Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to
its full extent.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
Operation
G017439
WARNING
Control panel in driver's door
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
•
Make sure that the windows are completely unobstructed before they are
operated.
•
To stop the window at any time, pull the
button up.
The ignition must be ON (ignition key in
position I, II or the engine running) for the
power windows to function.
The power windows will also function after
the ignition has been switched off as long
as neither of the front doors has been
opened.
•
Press the front part of any of the buttons (A
or B) as far down as possible and release
to automatically open the window completely.
Open/close rear windows
•
Always remove the ignition key when
the vehicle is unattended.
•
Open/close front windows
The power windows are controlled by buttons
in the arm rests.
•
•
Pull the front part of any of the buttons (A
or B) up as far as possible and release to
automatically close the window completely. To stop the window at any time,
press the button down.
Lockout switch for rear windows
NOTE
To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear
windows are opened, also open the front
windows slightly.
Closing a window
•
Lightly pull up the front edge of any of the
buttons (A or B) to the first detent ("stop")
02
G017440
Lightly press down the front edge of any of the
buttons (A or B) to the first detent ("stop") to
open a window to the position of your choice.
•
to close a window to the position of your
choice.
Opening a window
Lockout switch
The electrically operated rear door windows
can be disabled by a switch located on the
driver's door (see illustration).
If the light in the switch is OFF: The rear door
windows can be raised or lowered with the
``
75
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
buttons on the rear door armrests or with the
buttons on the driver's door armrest.
02
Power window controls – rear doors
If the light in the switch is ON: The rear door
windows can only be raised or lowered with the
buttons on the driver's door.
G028208
Power window control – front
passenger's side
G019511
The rear door windows can be operated with
the control on each door and with the switch
on the driver's door.
The control for the power window in the front
passenger's door operates that window only.
76
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
Rearview mirror with compass (option)
Rearview mirror
Calibrating the compass
Day/night control
Normal position
Night position, reduces glare from following traffic
Night position
To reduce glare from the headlights of following vehicles, use control (1) to switch between
the normal and night-driving positions.
Auto-dim function (option)
An optional integrated sensor reacts to headlights from following traffic and automatically
reduces glare.
G031045
G029930
G020146
02
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction toward which the car is
pointing. Eight different directions can be displayed: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The
display shows your car's orientation with
respect to true north.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is initially set for the zone to
which the car was delivered, and should
always be adjusted if the car is driven to a new
magnetic zone. A "C" will be displayed if calibration becomes necessary.
To calibrate the compass:
1. Stop the car in a large, open area, away
from traffic.
2. Using a pen or similar object, hold the button (1) depressed for at least 6 seconds.
"C" will be displayed.
``
77
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
Power door mirrors
Driver's door mirror:
±
02
Press the L button (a light in the switch will
go on) to activate the adjustment control.
Use this control to adjust the driver's door
mirror.
Passenger's door mirror:
G018252
G026409
1. Press the R switch (a light in the switch will
go on) to activate the adjustment control.
Use this control to adjust the passenger's
door mirror.
Magnetic zones
3. Press button (1) for at least 3 seconds to
display the number of the current magnetic
zone.
Storing the mirrors' position
5. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speed
of 6 mph (10 km/h) until a compass direction is displayed.
WARNING
The position of the door mirrors is stored when
the vehicle is locked. The next time the driver's
door is unlocked with the same remote control
and that door is opened within 2 minutes, the
optional power driver's seat and side door mirrors will automatically move to the position that
they were in when the doors were most
recently locked with the same remote control.
•
The mirrors should always be adjusted
prior to driving.
Folding power door mirrors (option on
certain markets only)
Calibration is complete.
•
Objects seen in the passenger's side
wide-angle door mirror are closer than
they appear to be.
The mirrors can be folded in for parking/driving
in narrow spaces.
4. Press button (1) repeatedly until the number for the required geographical area
(1 – 15) is displayed. "C" will be displayed
again.
78
The mirror control switches are located on the
driver's door armrest.
2. After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press
the L or R switch again (the LED will go out)
to deactivate the adjustment control.
The mirror control switches are located on the
driver's door armrest.
Adjusting the mirrors
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
Folding the mirrors in
Return to "neutral" position
1. Press down the L and R mirror control buttons on the driver's door at the same time.
If a mirror has been inadvertently moved (bumped in a parking lot, etc.) from its original (neutral) position, it must be moved back to this
position before automatic folding will function
again.
2. Release them after approximately one second. The mirrors automatically fold in to the
fully retracted position.
Folding the mirrors out
To so so:
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors
automatically fold out to the fully extended
position.
1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and
R mirror control buttons on the driver's
door at the same time.
Automatic folding
When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the
remote control or with the optional keyless
drive system (see page 123), the power door
mirrors with automatically fold in or out.
NOTE
The door mirrors will not fold out automatically when the vehicle is unlocked if they
were folded in using the buttons on the driver's door control panel.
02
2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and
R mirror control buttons.
This returns the mirrors to their original (neutral)
positions.
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) option
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an
information system that indicates the presence
of another vehicle in the side-view mirror's
"blind area." See page 164 for detailed information.
This function can be activated/deactivated in
Personal settings (see page 82). In the menu
system, go to Car settings Fold mirr. when
locking.
79
02 Instruments and controls
Power moonroof (option)
Operating the moonroof
Sliding moonroof
Auto open/close
02
Open: Pull the switch as far back as possible
(to position 1) and release it to automatically
slide open the moonroof.
Close: Push the switch as far forward as possible (to position 4) and release it to automatically close the moonroof.
To operate the moonroof, the ignition key must
first be turned to the intermediate or drive position (position I, II or the engine running). The
moonroof can be opened in two ways:
G029222
G007503
Manual open/close
Moonroof control in the ceiling console
Auto open
Manual open
Manual close
Tilt position
Auto close
Sliding moonroof
Tilt open
Tilt close
Tilt position
Open: Press the rear edge of the control
upward to position 5.
Close: Pull the rear edge of the control down to
position 6.
80
Open: Pull the switch back to the first stop
(position 2) and hold it until the moonroof has
opened to the position of your choice.
Close: Push the switch forward to the first stop
(position 3) and hold it until the moonroof has
closed to the position of your choice, or has
closed completely.
NOTE
If the moonroof is repeatedly obstructed
during auto-close operation, an overload
circuit breaker will temporarily halt moonroof function. The moonroof will return to
normal function after a brief cool-down
period.
02 Instruments and controls
Power moonroof (option)
CAUTION
•
Remove ice and snow before opening
the moonroof.
•
Do not operate the moonroof if it is frozen closed.
•
Never place heavy objects on the
moonroof.
Visor
02
If the moonroof is obstructed during
auto-close operation, it will automatically reverse direction and return to its
starting position.
•
During manual closing, if the moonroof
is obstructed, immediately open it
again.
WARNING
•
Never open or close the moonroof if it is
obstructed in any way.
•
Never allow a child to operate the
moonroof.
•
Never extend any object or body part
though the open moonroof, even if the
vehicle's ignition is completely
switched off.
•
Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
G020157
WARNING
•
The optional moonroof features a sliding visor.
The visor slides open automatically when the
moonroof is opened, and must be closed manually.
81
02 Instruments and controls
Personal settings
Control panel
Personal settings can be made for some of the
car's functions, such as the central locking
system, climate control, and the audio system.
Please refer to page 241 for more information
on the audio functions that can be adjusted.
The settings are presented in the display (A).
02
A
To access the menu and adjust settings
1. Press MENU (B).
2. Scroll to Car Settings using the menu navigation control (E).
E
B
D
C
3. Press ENTER (D).
4. Select an alternative using the menu navigation control (E).
5. Confirm your selection by pressing
ENTER.
G026307
To exit the menu
Display
Menu button
Exit button
Enter button
Menu navigation controls
82
Press EXIT (C).
2. Select hour(s) or minute(s) to be changed
with the left/right arrow keys.
3. Press ENTER to start the clock.
NOTE
If you are currently using the 12-hour time
setting, use the up/down arrow keys to
select AM/PM after the minute-setting has
been adjusted.
Lock confirmation light
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control, the direction indicators can be
selected to flash to confirm the action. The
alternatives On/Off are available for both locking and unlocking.
Autolock
When the car starts to move, the doors and
tailgate can be locked automatically. The alternatives On/Off are available.
Available settings
Clock adjust
To set the time:
1. Use the number keys or the up/down arrow
keys on the navigation control (E) to
change the hour or minute.
NOTE
Pulling the handle twice on a door unlocks
and opens that door.
Unlock
There are two alternatives for unlocking:
02 Instruments and controls
Personal settings
•
•
Global (All doors) – unlocks all doors and
the tailgate with one press on the remote
control.
Two Step (Two-stage unlocking) – This
alternative unlocks the driver's door with
one press on the remote control. A second
press unlocks the passenger's door and
the tailgate.
Temporarily turning off the alarm
sensor(s)
The alarm sensors can be temporarily turned
off (if, for example, a person or a pet remains
in the vehicle when the doors are locked from
outside with the remote control). There are two
alternatives:Activate once and Ask on exit,
see page 118 and 130 .
Automatically folding the door mirrors
Approach lighting
The setting makes it possible to automatically
fold the door mirrors in or out when the vehicle
is locked or unlocked. See page 78.
This alternative determines the length of time
for which the car's lights will remain on when
the Approach light button on the central locking system's remote control is pressed. Intervals of 30/60/90 seconds may be selected, see
teh section "Remote control functions" for
more information.
Operating side windows
The following alternative can be selected for
opening all side windows at the same time by
pressing and holding the Unlock switch in
either of the front doors (see page 127 for
additional information) 1
NOTE
The ignition key must be in position I or
higher (see page 143) before all side windows can be opened using the switches in
the front doors.
•
1
Auto open all windows On/Off
Information
•
VIN number – The VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) is the car's unique identity
number.
•
Number of Keys – the number of keys registered for the car is displayed here.
02
Climate functions
•
Blower speed in AUTO mode – the blower
speed can be set to AUTO mode in models
equipped with ECC. Choose between
"Low", "Normal" and "High".
•
Timer for recirculation – when the timer is
active, the air recirculates in the car for 3–
12 minutes depending on the ambient temperature. Select On/Off depending on
whether the recirculation timer is to be
active or not.
Home safe lighting
This alternative determines the length of time
for which the car's lights will remain on when
the high beam lever on the steering column is
pulled toward the wheel with the ignition
switched off. Intervals of 30/60/90 seconds
may be selected, see page 64 for information
on using this function.
Keyless locking and unlocking (option as
available)
The following alternatives can be selected for
locking and unlocking the doors and tailgate:
•
All doors – all doors are locked or unlocked
at the same time.
•
Doors on the same side – front and rear
doors on the same side are unlocked
together.
This menu alternative also makes it possible to open all side windows by pressing and holding the Unlock button on the remote control for several seconds.
``
83
02 Instruments and controls
Personal settings
02
•
Both front doors – both front doors are
unlocked together.
•
One front door – either of the front doors
can be unlocked separately2.
Reset to factory settings
Use this alternative to return to the default climate system settings.
2
84
Factory default.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)
Introduction
G030070
WARNING
The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems, even home lighting. Additional HomeLink information can be found on
the Internet at www.homelink.com.
•
If you use HomeLink to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
gate or door while it is in motion.
•
When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of
the garage.
•
Do not use HomeLink with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal
safety standards. For more information,
contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF device
you are programming for use in other vehicles
as well as for future HomeLink programming. It
is also suggested that upon the sale of the
vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing
HomeLink Buttons”.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE
02
Some vehicles may require the ignition
switch to be turned on or to the second
(“accessories”) position for programming
and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device
being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator
light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
``
85
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)
NOTE
02
Some devices may require you to replace
this Programming Step 2 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Programming” section. If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these steps,
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press
and hold the just-trained HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
•
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with “Programming” steps 4-6 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped
device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motorhead unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”
or “smart” button. This can usually be
86
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.) There
are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold
for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence a second
time, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming
process.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Programming” pro-
cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”
step 2 with the following:
•
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release every two seconds (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to complete.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will
now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage
door opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For
convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the
event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash-after 10 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 20 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at
any time beginning with “Programming” step 1.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained, follow
these steps:
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any
interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
02
NOTE
The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
device.1
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with “Programming”
- step 1.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
1
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
87
88
90
92
93
96
99
G020906
General information.................................................................................
Air vents..................................................................................................
Manual climate control............................................................................
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) – option..............................................
Air distribution.........................................................................................
CLIMATE
03
03 Climate
General information
03
Air conditioning – A/C
Fog on the inside of the windows
Passenger compartment filter
Your car is equipped with a climate control
system that includes either manually adjustable air conditioning or optional Electronic Climate Control (ECC).
The defroster function should be used to
remove fog or mist from the inside of the windows. Keeping the windows clean with a commercially available window washing spray will
also help prevent fogging or misting
Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at
the recommended intervals. Please refer to
your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, or consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for these intervals.
The filter should be replaced more often when
driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The
filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should
always be replaced with a new one.
The air conditioning system can be switched
off, but for optimal air quality in the passenger
compartment and to prevent the windows from
fogging, the air conditioning should be left on
– even in cool weather.
NOTE
In warm weather, a small amount of water
may accumulate under the car when it has
been parked. This water is condensation
from the A/C system and is normal.
Ice and snow
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
the windshield free of snow.
Climate control maintenance
Special tools and equipment are required to
maintain and carry out repairs on the climate
system. Work of this type should only be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
NOTE
There are different types of cabin air filters.
Ensure that the correct type is installed.
Refrigerant
Volvo cares about the environment. The air
conditioning system in your car contains a
CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance
will not deplete the ozone layer. The system
contains 1.2 lbs (530 g) R134a (HFC 134a), and
uses PAG oil.
Display
The display above the climate control panel
shows the climate settings that have been
made.
Personal settings
There are two functions in the climate system
that can be set to your preferences:
90
•
Blower speed to Auto mode (models with
ECC only).
•
Timer controlled recirculation of the air in
the passenger compartment.
03 Climate
General information
For information about how to make these settings, see the Personal settings section on
page 82.
closed. If you drive with the windows or moonroof open, it may be preferable to manually
adjust the temperature and blower control (the
LED in the AUTO switch should be off).
Models equipped with ECC (option)
Acceleration
Sensors
The air conditioning system is temporarily
switched off during full throttle acceleration.
•
The sunlight sensor is on the upper side of
the dashboard
•
The passenger compartment temperature
sensor is located behind the climate system control panel.
•
The ambient temperature sensor is in the
driver's side door mirror.
•
The humidity sensor is in the rearview mirror.
03
These sensors should never be obstructed.
NOTE
The sunlight sensor monitors the side of the
vehicle from which the sun shines into the
passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature may differ slightly between
the left and right air vents, even if the climate
system temperature is set to be the same
for both sides of the passenger compartment.
Side windows and optional moonroof
The electronic climate control system will function best if the windows and moonroof are
91
03 Climate
Air vents
Air vents in the dashboard
G019942
03
Open
Closed
Horizontal air flow
Vertical air flow
Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.
92
03 Climate
Manual climate control
G019515
03
Climate system control panel
Blower speed
Manual climate system functions
Recirculation
1. Blower
Defroster
Airflow controls
A/C – ON/OFF
Heated driver's seat
Heated front passenger's seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
The blower speed can be
increased or decreased by
turning the knob. If the knob is
turned counterclockwise and
the indicator light in the display goes out, the blower and
the air conditioning are
switched off. The display shows the blower
symbol and OFF.
2. Recirculation
This function can be used to
shut out exhaust fumes,
smoke, etc from the passenger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is then recirculated, i.e. no air
from outside the car is taken
into the car when this function is activated.
Recirculation (together with the air conditioning system) cools the passenger compartment
more quickly in very warm weather. If the air in
the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk
of condensation forming on the insides of the
windows, especially in winter.
``
93
03 Climate
Manual climate control
03
Timer
4. Airflow controls
The timer function minimizes the risk of misting, or stale air when the recirculation function
is selected, see page 82 for information on setting the recirculation timer. Recirculation is
always disengaged when you select Defroster
(3).
Press one of the three buttons
in the illustration to activate
the selected airflow. A symbol
in the display above the climate control panel and a lit
LED in the selected button
indicate that the manual function has been selected. With manually selected
airflow both warm and cool air can be selected.
The desired temperature is selected using control 9.
3. Defroster
Directs airflow to the windshield and side windows and
increases blower speed.
5. A/C – On or Off
When the defroster is activated:
•
Air flows to the windows at high blower
speed.
•
The LED in the defroster button lights up
when this function is activated. The air conditioning system is controlled to provide
maximum air dehumidification.
•
94
The air conditioning is automatically
switched on (can be switched off by pressing button 5).
ON: The air conditioning system is engaged when the ON
light is lit.
OFF: The system is disengaged when the OFF lights
up.
If Defroster (3) is activated the air conditioning
is always engaged.
6/7. Heated front seats (option)
Maximum heating: Press the
button once – both LEDs light
up.
Reduced heating: Press the button a second
time – one LED lights up.
Seat heating off: Press the button a third time
– no LEDs are lit.
8. Heated rear window and door mirrors
Press to defrost the rear window and door mirrors.
The rear window and door
mirrors are defrosted simultaneously if the switch is
pressed once. The defrost
function is active if the LED in the switch is illuminated.
•
The function can be switched off manually
by pressing the button,
•
The defrost function switches off automatically after 12–20 minutes, depending on
the outside temperature.
NOTE
On certain markets, the defrost function
may remain on longer than 20 minutes in
cold weather to help keep the rear window
free from ice or condensation.
03 Climate
Manual climate control
9. Temperature selector
The knob with the thermometer symbol is used to select
cooling or heating for both the
driver's and passenger's
sides of the car.
03
95
03 Climate
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) – option
G019518
03
Auto – On/Off
ECC functions
Blower speed
1. Auto – On/Off
The AUTO function automatically regulates climate control to maintain the desired
temperature. The automatic
function controls heating, air
conditioning, blower speed,
recirculation, and air distribu-
Recirculation
Defroster
Airflow controls
A/C – ON/OFF
Heated driver's seat
Heated front passenger's seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
96
tion.
If you select one or more manual functions, the
remaining functions continue to be controlled
automatically. All manual settings are switched
off when AUTO is switched on. AUTO
CLIMATE is shown in the display.
2. Blower speed
The blower speed can be
increased or decreased by
turning the knob. The blower
speed is regulated automatically if AUTO is selected. The
previously set blower speed is
disconnected.
NOTE
If the knob is turned counterclockwise and
the blower indication in the display goes
out, the blower and the air conditioning are
switched off. The display shows the blower
symbol and OFF.
03 Climate
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) – option
3. Recirculation
This function can be used to
shut out exhaust fumes,
smoke, etc from the passenger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is then recirculated, i.e. no air
from outside the car is taken
into the car when this function is activated.
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of condensation forming on the
insides of the windows, especially in winter.
Timer
The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging
or stale air when the recirculation function is
selected, see page 82 for information on setting the recirculation timer.
NOTE
Recirculation is always disengaged if the
defroster button is engaged to clear ice or
condensation from the side windows.
4. Defroster
6. Air conditioning On/Off
Directs airflow to the windshield and side windows and
increases blower speed.
When the defroster is activated:
ON: The air conditioning system is engaged when the ON
light is lit and is controlled
automatically by the system
to maintain the selected temperature.
•
Air flows to the windows at high blower
speed.
OFF: The system is disengaged when the
OFF lights up
•
The LED in the defroster button lights up
when this function is activated. The air conditioning system is controlled to provide
maximum air dehumidification.
When OFF is selected and the OFF LED is lit,
the air conditioning system is deactivated.
Other functions are still controlled automatically.
•
The air conditioning is automatically
switched on (can be switched off by pressing button 6).
The air is not recirculated.
5. Airflow controls
Press one of the three buttons
in the illustration to activate
the selected airflow. A symbol
in the display above the climate control panel and a lit
LED in the selected button
indicate that the manual function has been selected. With manually selected
airflow both warm and cool air can be selected.
See also the table on page 97.
03
When Defroster (4) is selected, the air conditioning system is activated for maximum dehumidifying.
7 and 8. Heated front seats (option)
Maximum heating: Press the
button once – both LEDs light
up.
Reduced heating: Press the
button a second time – one
LED lights up.
Seat heating off: Press the button a third time
– no LEDs are lit.
``
97
03 Climate
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) – option
9. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Press to defrost the rear window and door mirrors.
03
The rear window and door
mirrors are defrosted simultaneously if the switch is
pressed once. The defrost
function is active if the LED in the switch is illuminated.
10. Temperature selector
The temperatures on the driver's and passenger's sides
can be set separately using
the knob (with the thermometer in it). The temperature can
be set for both sides of the car
when the ignition is switched
on (both LEDs will be on), which means that a
temperature setting will apply to both sides of
the car.
•
The function can be switched off manually
by pressing the button.
To set the temperature on one side of the car:
•
The defrost function switches off automatically after 12–20 minutes, depending on
the outside temperature.
1. Press the knob once. The LED for one side
of the car will light up. Turn the knob to
adjust the temperature.
NOTE
•
On certain markets, the defrost function
may remain on longer than 20 minutes
in cold weather to help keep the rear
window free from ice or condensation.
2. Press the knob a second time to set the
temperature on the opposite side of the
car.
3. Press the knob a third time to set the temperature on both sides of the car at the
same time.
NOTE
Selecting a temperature that is higher or
lower than necessary will not heat or cool
the passenger compartment faster.
98
03 Climate
Air distribution
Air distribution
Use:
Air distribution
Use:
Defroster.
Defrost/de-fog the windshield and front side windows.
Air to the floor and windows.
For comfortable conditions and good defrosting
in cold weather.
Air is not recirculated in
this mode.
Air conditioning is always
engaged.
There is also a certain
amount of airflow to the
dashboard air vents.
Medium to high blower
speed.
03
There is also a certain
amount of airflow to the
panel air vents.
Air to windshield and front
side windows.
Prevents fogging in cold
or humid weather (blower
speed should be moderate to high).
Air to the floor and from
the dashboard air vents.
For sunny weather with
cool ambient temperatures.
Air to the windows and
from the dashboard air
vents.
For good comfort in
warm, dry weather.
Air to the floor.
To warm the feet.
Airflow directed to the
head and chest from the
dashboard air vents.
To ensure efficient cooling
in a warm weather.
Airflow to the windows,
dashboard air vents, and
floor.
There is also a certain
amount of airflow to the
dashboard air vents.
There is a certain amount
of airflow to the dashboard and window air
vents.
For cooler air toward the
feet, or for warmer air
toward the head and
chest.
99
100
102
105
107
111
113
G020908
Front seats............................................................................................
Interior lighting......................................................................................
Storage compartments.........................................................................
Rear seat...............................................................................................
Cargo area............................................................................................
INTERIOR
04
04 Interior
Front seats
Manual seat adjustment
Turn this knob to adjust the backrest tilt.
Folding down the front seat backrests
Control panel for power seats.
WARNING
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
•
Position the seat as far rearward as
comfort and control allow.
Adjust the driver’s seat and seat belt
(see page 18) before driving. The seat
should be adjusted so that the brake
pedal can be depressed fully.
The driver's and passenger's seats can be
adjusted in a number of ways to provide a
comfortable driving and sitting position.
Forward-rearward: Pull the lever up and
slide the seat to the position of your choice.
Use this control to raise or lower the front
edge of the seat cushion.
1
102
G014805
G027960
04
•
•
The front passenger's seat backrest can be
folded down to provide room for long loads.
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Adjust the backrest to the upright position.
3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
as shown in the illustration.
Use this control to raise or lower the rear
edge of the seat cushion.
4. Without releasing the catches, push the
backrest forward.
Turn this knob (option on some passenger's seats) to adjust the firmness of the
lumbar support1.
5. Move the seat as far forward as possible
so that the head restraint slides under the
glove compartment.
Also applies to the optional power seat.
04 Interior
Front seats
WARNING
Adjusting the seat
NOTE
Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to
help prevent shifting during sudden stops.
The power seats have an overload protector
that activates if a seat is blocked by any
object. If this occurs, switch off the ignition
(key in position 0) and wait for approximately 20 seconds before operating the
seat again.
Power seats (option)
The power driver's seat can be adjusted:
If the ignition key is in position I or II.
•
If the door is closed and the ignition key is
not yet in the ignition, or if the key is in
position 0, the seat can be adjusted or during a period of 40 seconds. The power
passenger's seat can only be adjusted if
the ignition key is in position I or II, or if the
engine is running.
Emergency stop
If the seat inadvertently begins to move, press
any of the buttons to stop the seat.
G020199
During a 10 minute period after the doors
have been unlocked if the door remains
open.
04
Programming the seat memory, driver's
seat only (option)
Seat adjustment controls
Seat adjustment controls 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the
side of the seat can be used to move the seat
to the position of your choice.
Move this section of the control up or down
to raise/lower the front section of the seat
cushion.
Move the control forward/rearward to
move the seat forward or rearward.
Move this section of the control up or down
to raise/lower the rear section of the seat
cushion.
Backrest tilt.
G020200
•
•
Power seat memory buttons
``
103
04 Interior
Front seats
Three different seating positions can be stored
in the seat's memory. The memory buttons are
located on the outboard side of the driver's
seat (see the illustration above). The following
example explains how memory button 1 can be
programmed. Buttons 2 and 3 can be programmed in the same way.
To program (store) a seat position in memory
button 1:
04
1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.
2. Press and hold down the "M" (Memory)
button.
3. With the "M" button depressed, press
memory button 1 to store the seat's current
position.
To move the seat to the position that it was in
when memory button 1 was programmed,
press and hold down button 1 until the seat
stops moving.
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop automatically if the button is released before the
seat has reached the preset position.
Central locking system remote control
and driver's seat memory
The remote control transmitter can also be
equipped with an optional function that controls the electrically operated driver's seat in
the following way:
104
1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.
2. When you leave the car, lock it using the
remote control.
3. The next time the driver's door is unlocked
with the same remote control and that door
is opened within 2 minutes, the driver's
seat and side door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in
when the doors were most recently locked
with the same remote control.
WARNING
•
Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
car.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on
the power seat control panel.
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.
•
The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.
NOTE
The memory function in the remote control
operates independently the memory function in the seat.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
•
Press the left side of the button: the interior
courtesy lighting turns on.
•
Neutral position: the interior courtesy lighting comes on when a door is opened, and
is switched off 10 seconds after the door is
closed.
•
Press the right side of the button: the interior courtesy lighting stays off.
G020201
Courtesy lighting – automatic function
The interior lighting has a built-in automatic
function that switches on the courtesy lighting
for 30 seconds when:
•
the car is unlocked from the outside using
the key or remote control
•
the engine is switched off and the ignition
key is turned to the 0 position.
Front courtesy lights and reading lights
Front driver's side reading light, on/off
Courtesy lighting
Front passenger's side reading light, on/off
If the courtesy lighting is not switched off manually, it will be turned off automatically
5 minutes after the engine has been switched
off.
Footwell lighting
The footwell (and courtesy lighting) comes on
or goes off when one of the side doors is
opened or closed.
Rear reading lights
04
The courtesy lighting lights up or remains on
for 5 minutes when:
•
•
one of the doors is opened and left open.
The front and rear reading lights can be activated when the ignition key is position I or II, or
when the engine is running. The front reading
lights are switched on and off by pressing buttons (1) or (3).
The automatic lighting goes out when:
The courtesy lighting (2) can be set to three
positions:
•
•
the courtesy lighting has not been
switched off (the right side of button 2
depressed).
G020763
Interior lighting
Rear reading lights (in ceiling)
the engine is started
Rear driver's side reading light, on/off
the car is locked from the outside using the
key or remote control.
Rear passenger's side reading light, on/off
``
105
04 Interior
Interior lighting
The rear reading lights can be switched on or
off by pressing the respective buttons, and
function if the ignition key is in positions I, II, or
if the engine is running.
The courtesy lighting can be switched on or off
within 30 minutes after the engine has been
switched off, or after a door has been opened
or closed.
These lights switch off automatically 5 minutes
after the engine has been switched off.
04
G020210
Vanity mirror
Raise the cover to switch on the light.
106
04 Interior
Storage compartments
G026508
04
``
107
04 Interior
Storage compartments
Storage pocket (on the rear side of the front
seats)
Glove compartment
Jacket hanger
Compartment in door panel
Storage pocket (on the front side of the
front seat cushion)
Glove compartment
Storage compartment for e.g., CDs and
cup holders
Storage pocket (on the front side of the
rear, center seat cushion).
WARNING
108
•
Anchor any heavy objects to prevent
them from moving during sudden stops.
•
Packages on the rear parcel shelf can
obscure vision and may become dangerous projectiles in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
The owners manual and maps can be stored
here. There are also holders for coins, pens and
fuel cards. The glove compartment can only be
locked and unlocked using the detachable key
blade from the central locking system's remote
control. See page 120 for information on
removing the key blade from the remote control, and page 127 for information about locking the glove compartment.
G018137
Rear seat storage compartment and cup
holders
G024208
Jacket hanger (intended for light garments
only)
04
The jacket hanger is located on the inboard
side of the front passenger's seat head
restraint. It is only intended for hanging light
garments.
04 Interior
Storage compartments
Storage under the front, center armrest
Cup holders in the center console
CD storage
There are two storage compartments under the
front, center armrest.
•
Press the smaller button on the front edge
of the armrest and lift the armrest cover to
access a shallow storage compartment.
•
Press the larger button and lift the entire
armrest to access a deeper compartment.
The deep storage compartment has room for
10 CD jewel cases. These cases must be
inserted with their spines upward in order to
allow space for 10 cases in the storage compartment
G018372
G026704
G018371
04
Two cup holders are located under the sliding
cover in the center console.
The cup holders can be lifted out if necessary.
To do so, grasp the indentation on the rear
edge of the cup holder and lift.
To put the cup holder back in place:
1. Slide the two locating tabs in the front side
of the cup holder into the two corresponding recesses in the center console storage
space.
2. Press down the rear edge of the cup
holder.
To close the sliding cover, grasp the underside
of the front edge and pull.
``
109
04 Interior
Storage compartments
Storage compartment behind the gear
lever
G019623
04
If the buttons for optional equipment are not
installed, the recess behind the gear lever can
be used as a storage compartment for coins,
etc.
110
04 Interior
Rear seat
Rear seat head restraints
•
To raise: Slide the head restraint up to the
desired height.
•
To lower: Press the catch at the base of the
right support and press the head restraint
down.
•
To remove: Pull the head restraint up far as
possible. Press the catch at the base of the
right support and pull the head restraint out
of the its holders.
seat belts can be attached to the clothes hook
as shown in the illustration.
NOTE
When the seat backs are folded down, the
head restraints may be damaged if they are
not removed. The center head restraint
must also be removed when transporting
heavy loads.
Folding down the rear seat backrests
G020765
04
Adjust the head restraint vertically
The center rear seat head restraint should
only be in its lowest position when this seat
is NOT occupied. When the center position
is occupied, the head restraint should be
correctly adjusted to the passenger’s
height.
G020790
WARNING
G014845
Each of the rear seat head restraints can be
adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper edge of the head restraint
should be on a level with the midpoint of the
rear side of the passenger's head (see illustration).
Rear edge of seat cushion
Both sections of the rear seat backrest can be
folded down, together or separately, to enable
you to transport long objects. Before folding
down the rear seat backrests, the outboard
Catch
Folding down the backrest
Location of the head restraint in the seat
cushion
``
111
04 Interior
Rear seat
To fold down one or both sections:
1. Grasp the rear edge of the seat cushion
and pull it forward.
2. Pull the catch on the upper outboard edge
of the backrest upward and forward to
release the backrest lock. A red lock indicator is visible when the backrest is not
locked in the upright position.
04
•
The red lock indicator is VISIBLE when
the backrest is NOT locked in position
and hidden when the backrest is correctly locked in place. When the backrest is in the upright position, it must
always be correctly locked in place.
•
When the rear seat is folded down, do
not place heavy objects against the
backs of the front seats. This places a
severe strain on the folded down backrest of the rear seat. Be sure to secure
cargo.
•
Cargo must not be stacked higher than
the top of seat backs. This will reduce
the possibility of luggage, etc. becoming projectiles during sudden maneuvers, rapid braking or an accident.
3. Fold the backrest down partially and
remove the outboard head restraints.
Press the center head restraint down completely or remove it.
4. Place the head restraints in the plastic
tubes, which are now accessible on the
under side of the seat cushions.
NOTE
When folding down the rear seat backrests,
remove the plug in the rear 12 volt socket to
help avoid marks in the upholstery.
112
WARNING
04 Interior
Cargo area
Steel grid (option)
Removing the grid
Cargo area cover (option)
To remove the grid from the vehicle:
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests slightly
to the release pressure on the grid's struts.
2. Remove the covers over the nuts holding
the grid on each side.
The steel grid prevents cargo from being
thrown forward into the passenger area in the
event of sudden braking.
Folding up the grid
When it is not in use, the grid can be folded up
against the ceiling's headliner:
1. Grasp the lower arch of the grid.
2. Pull it rearward and upward, and release it.
The struts prevent the grid from falling.
Lower the grid by pulling down on the arch.
4. Turn the grid slightly rearward so that it is
clear of the upholstery. Do not angle the
grid too much as it can become wedged in
place and be difficult to remove.
5. Perform the same procedure on the opposite side of the grid, and then lift the grid
out of the vehicle.
Installing the grid
To reinstall the grid, perform the procedures
above in reverse order.
If you are uncertain about removing or installing
the grid, please contact your Volvo retailer.
04
G020766
G014730
3. Loosen the nuts until the threads are flush
with the edge of the nuts.
Putting the cargo area in place
Pull out the cargo area cover and hook it in the
grooves in the rear cargo area pillars (see illustration above).
Installing the cargo area cover
1. Position the end of the cover over the
retaining holes in the cargo area near the
rear seat backrest.
2. Press the button on the upper side of the
cargo area cover forward to release the
catches.
3. Press the end of the cargo area cover into
place.
``
113
04 Interior
Cargo area
4. Release the button to lock the cargo area
cover in place.
2. Press the button on the upper edge of the
cover forward to release the catches.
5. Repeat this procedure on the opposite side
of the cargo area.
3. Lift out the end of the cargo area cover
from the retaining holes.
Check that the cargo area cover is securely in
place.
4. Repeat the procedure on the opposite side
of the cargo area.
Both versions of the cargo area cover are
options that may be available for your vehicle. Consult your Volvo retailer.
Cargo area net (accessory)
G020767
114
2. Insert the net's right attachment in the rearmost hole in the mounting bracket (see
illustration) and push it forward into the
smaller hole in the bracket to secure it in
place.
WARNING
Fold the front section of the cargo area cover
forward into the wedge-shaped grooves near
the rear seat.
Be sure that the net is securely attached in
the mounting brackets.
G020768
1. Lift the forward section of the cover, fold it
rearward in the vehicle, and let it hang
freely.
1. From the cargo compartment, pull the net
upward.
3. Pull out the spring-loaded attachment on
the left side of the net and insert it in the
bracket on the left side of the vehicle in the
same way.
Fold the front section of the cover forward
Removing the cargo area cover
The holder for the retractable net is mounted
on the rear side of the backrests.
Using the net with the backrests in the
upright position
NOTE
04
The Volvo V50 can be equipped with a cargo
area net made of strong nylon fabric that can
be used with the rear seat backrests in the
upright position or folded down.
Using the cargo net with the backrest
folded down
Fasten the net in the same way as described
above, using the front mounting brackets.
04 Interior
Cargo area
Retracting the cargo net
1. Pull back one of the net's attachments to
the large hole in the mounting bracket.
2. Pull the attachment out of the mounting
bracket.
3. Do the same on the opposite side of the
vehicle.
4. Lower the net into its holder.
Removing the cargo net's holder
1. Fold the rear seat backrests forward
slightly. Begin by folding the narrower section of the backrest.
Load anchoring eyelets
2. Pull the cargo net up and to the rear.
3. Return the backrests to the upright position.
Insert the net's end attachments into the
mounting brackets (see the illustration).
WARNING
2. Push the holder out until it releases from its
retaining brackets.
04
The eyelets in the cargo area can be used to
fasten accessory load and lashing straps, load
nets, and other load anchors.
G020769
Using the net with the cargo area cover
The red lock indicator on the rear seat
backrests is VISIBLE when the backrest is
NOT locked in position and hidden when the
backrest is correctly locked in place. When
the backrest is in the upright position, it
must always be correctly locked in place.
G014757
1. Fold down the backrests
115
Remote control and key blade..............................................................
Keyless drive (option as available)........................................................
Locking and unlocking..........................................................................
Child safety locks..................................................................................
Alarm (option)........................................................................................
116
118
123
127
129
130
LOCKS AND ALARM
05
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
Two remote controls that also function as ignition keys are provided with your car. The
remote controls contain detachable metal key
blades for manually locking or unlocking the
driver's door and the glove compartment.
USA – FCC ID: LTQVO315TX
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
05
Canada – IC: 3659AVO315TX
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Loss of a remote control
If either of the remote controls is lost, the other
must be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer.
As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost
remote control must be erased from the system.
Each key blade has a unique code, which is
used if new key blades are required. A maxi-
118
mum of six remote controls/key blades can be
programmed and used for one car.
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)
Each of the keys supplied with your car contains a coded transponder. The code in the key
is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition
switch where it is compared to the code stored
in the start inhibitor module. The car will start
only with a properly coded key. If you misplace
a key, take the other keys to an authorized
Volvo retailer for reprogramming as an antitheft
measure.
CAUTION
Never use force on the narrow section of the
remote control – this is where the transponder is located. The car cannot be started
if the transponder is damaged.
Remote control functions
USA – FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following condition: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
G019402
Remote controls
Canada – IC: 3659A-WFS125VO
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Lock – Press the Lock button on the
remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate. The turn signals will flash once to
confirm locking.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
NOTE
NOTE
•
The car can also be locked if a door is open
(does not apply to vehicles with the optional
keyless drive).
Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the
remote once to unlock the driver's door.
After a short pause, press the Unlock button a second time within 10 seconds to
unlock the other doors and the tailgate. A
long press (at least two seconds) opens all
side windows.
•
The turn signals flash to confirm that the
vehicle has been correctly locked/
unlocked with the remote control or the
optional keyless drive. When locking the
vehicle, the turn signals will flash a confirmation only if all the doors are
securely closed and locked. Flashing
confirmation for locking and unlocking
may be customized in the vehicle's Personal settings menu, see page 82 for
more information.
The two-step unlocking function can be
changed so that one press of the
Unlock button unlocks all of the doors
and the tailgate. See Personal settings
page 82 for more information.
Approach lighting – As you approach the
car: Press the button on the remote control
to illuminate the area around the car in dark
conditions. Pressing the button once lights
up the interior lighting, parking lights, and
license plate lighting. These lights will
switch off automatically after 30, 60 or
90 seconds. See the Personal settings pa
ge 82 for information about adjusting the
time setting.
Unlock tailgate – Press the button once to
disarm the alarm system and unlock only
the tailgate. After closing, the tailgate will
not automatically relock. Press Lock to
relock it and rearm the alarm.
05
NOTE
This function will not open the tailgate.
•
Automatic relocking: If the doors are
unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will rearm after
2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has
been opened.
•
Automatic locking: When the car starts to
move, the doors and tailgate can be locked
automatically. This feature can be turned
on or off, see Personal settings on page
82 for more information.
•
Airbag deployment will automatically
attempt to unlock the doors.
Panic alarm – This button can be used to
attract attention during emergency situations. To activate the panic alarm, press
and hold the red button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds.
The turn signals and horn will be activated.
The panic alarm will stop automatically
after 30 seconds. To deactivate, wait
approximately 5 seconds and press the red
button again.
``
119
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
Replacing the battery in the remote
control
NOTE
This button will NOT unlock the car.
Key blade
If the range of the transmitter is noticeably
reduced, this indicates that the battery (type
CR 2450, 3V) is weak and should be replaced.
To replace the battery:
Weak battery in the remote control
1. Place the remote control with the keypad
downward. Pry open the cover with a small
slotted screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover.
G019406
05
When the battery begins to lose its charge, the
Information symbol in the instrument panel
(see page 53) lights up and KEY BATTERY
LOW VOLTAGE is shown in the information
display.
3. Note how the + and – sides of the battery
are positioned on the inside of the cover
(see the underside of the cover).
4. Pry out and replace the battery. Avoid
touching the battery and its contact surfaces with your fingers.
5. Press the cover back into place.
The old battery should be disposed of properly
at a recycling center or by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
120
G019403
CAUTION
When replacing the battery, avoid touching
the electrical circuitry in the other half of the
remote control.
Removing the key blade
The key blade can be removed from the remote
control. When removed, it can be used as follows:
•
•
To lock/unlock the driver’s door
To lock/unlock the glove compartment,
see page 127
Removing the key blade
Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.
While holding the catch, pull the key blade
out of the remote control.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
Reinserting the key blade in the remote
control
2. Turn the key blade one-quarter turn counter-clockwise to lock the driver's door.
1. Hold the remote control with the pointed
end down.
2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
3. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.
Unlocking the doors with the detached
key blade
±
Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
driver's door lock. Turn the key blade
clockwise approximately one-quarter turn
to unlock the driver's door only.
05
NOTE
After unlocking the driver's door with the
key blade, opening the door will trigger the
alarm.
To disable the alarm
Press the Unlock button on the remote control,
or insert the key in the ignition switch.
Locking the doors with the detached key
blade
1. Lock the other door(s) by pressing the lock
button on each door. Please note that this
does not arm the alarm or lock the tailgate.
``
121
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
G019450
Locking points
05
Locking/unlocking points for the remote
control with the key blade
Locking/unlocking points for the remote
control without the key blade
By utilizing the remote control with the key
blade removed, you can block access to the
glove compartment for e.g. valet parking or
when the car is brought to the retailer for service.
122
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive (option as available)
Keyless locking and unlocking
Both of the remote controls provided with the
vehicle have the keyless function, and additional remotes can be ordered. The system can
accommodate up to six keyless drive remote
controls.
Locking the vehicle
NOTE
Unlocking the vehicle
•
Range of the keyless drive remote control–5 ft
(1.5 meters)
This system makes it possible to unlock and
lock the vehicle without having to use the
remote control. It is only necessary to have a
keyless drive remote control in your possession to operate the central locking system.
•
•
NOTE
The buttons on the keyless drive remote
control can also be used to lock and unlock
the vehicle, see page 118 for more information.
A keyless drive remote control must be on
the same side of the vehicle as the door to
be opened, and be within 5 feet
(1.5 meters) of the lock or the tailgate opening control (see the shaded areas in the
illustration).
G020033
G019451
The number of doors that are unlocked at
the same time can be set in the Personal
settings menu, see page 82 for additional
information.
Keyless drive lock button
The doors and the tailgate can be locked by
pressing the lock button in any of the outside
door handles.
Pull a door handle to unlock and open the
door or press the tailgate opening control
on the tailgate.
See page 146 for information on starting a
vehicle equipped with keyless drive.
05
NOTE
•
If one or more doors and/or the tailgate
is not fully closed when the lock button
is pressed, the door(s) or tailgate will not
be locked.
•
On keyless drive vehicles with an automatic transmission, the gear selector
must be in the Park (P) position and the
ignition must be switched off before the
doors/tailgate can be locked.
``
123
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive (option as available)
to unlock the driver's door only. This will
trigger the alarm.
Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the
key blade
•
To disable the alarm: Press the Unlock
button on the keyless drive remote control.
If the batteries in the remote are weak,
remove the keyless drive start control from
the ignition switch by pressing the catch
(see the illustration on page 146) and pulling the control out of the ignition switch.
Insert the ignition key section of a keyless
drive remote control in the ignition switch.
G020225
Keyless drive remote control and driver's
seat memory
05
Keyless drive keyhole cover
The driver's door on vehicles equipped with
keyless drive can be locked or unlocked with
the remote control's detachable key blade if
necessary, see page 120 for information on
removing the key blade from the remote control. To access the keyhole in the driver's door:
124
•
Pry off the keyhole cover by inserting the
key blade or a small screwdriver in the hole
on the underside of the cover (indicated by
the arrow in the inset illustration).
•
Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
driver's door lock. Turn the key blade
clockwise approximately one-quarter turn
NOTE
If several people carrying keyless drive
remote controls approach the vehicle at the
same time, the driver's seat will assume the
position it was in for the person who opens
a door first.
Keyless drive information messages
If anyone leaves the vehicle with the only keyless drive remote control in his or her possession while the ignition is switched on, a
message will be shown in the information display and an audible signal will sound.
This function is only available on vehicles
equipped with the optional power driver's seat.
•
When you leave the car with a keyless drive
remote control in your possession and lock
any door, the position of the driver's seat
will be stored in the seat's memory.
•
The next time a door is opened by a person
with the same remote control in his/her
possession, the driver's seat will automatically move to the position that it was in
when the door was most recently locked.
NOTE
This message will only be displayed if the
start control is in position I or II.
The message will be erased from the display
and the audible signal will stop when the
remote control has been returned to the vehicle
and one of the following has occurred:
•
•
A door has been opened and closed
•
The READ button (see page 58 for the
location of this button) has been pressed.
The start control has been turned to position 0
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive (option as available)
•
KR55WK48964
Keyless drive remote controls should
never be left in the vehicle. In the event
of a break-in, a remote found in the
vehicle could make it possible to start
the engine.
NOTE
Electromagnetic fields or metal
obstructions can interfere with the keyless drive system. Avoid placing the
remote control near cellular phones,
metallic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
G020074
•
CAUTION
Canada – IC:267T- 5WK48952,
Siemens VDO
267T- 5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891
5WK48891
NOTE
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For Automobile Use
Under the floor of the cargo area, near the
rear seat
Location of the keyless drive antennas
Right rear door handle
The keyless drive system has a number of
antennas located at various points in the vehicle.
Under the rear section of the center console
CAUTION
On the inside center of the rear bumper
05
Left rear door handle
Under the front section of the center console
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952,
``
125
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive (option as available)
WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should
not allow the pacemaker to come closer
than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless
drive system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker
and the keylesss drive system.
05
126
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
NOTE
•
The ignition key must be in position I or
higher (see page 143) before all side
windows can be opened using the
switches in the front doors.
•
The doors cannot be opened by pulling
up the lock buttons.
•
Each door can also be locked manually
using the lock button on that particular
door. This applies only if the car has not
been locked from the outside.
•
The doors can also be unlocked (and
the door opened) by pulling the handle
in the door twice.
The switches near the door opening handles on
the driver's and front passenger's doors can be
used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate, open the side windows1, and to set the
alarm.
•
•
1
Unlocking: Press the upper section of the
switch. A long press (for several seconds)
also opens all the side windows.
Locking: Press the lower section of the
lock button.
Locking the glove compartment
G020034
G007451
Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the
inside
05
The glove compartment can only be locked
and unlocked using the detachable key blade
on the remote control, see page 120 for information on removing the key blade from the
remote control.
Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The key slot will be in the horizontal position.
Remove the key blade from the lock.
This function must be set to On in the Personal settings menu (see page 83)
``
127
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
Unlock the glove compartment in the reverse
order.
05
128
05 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
G014697
Manual child safety locks, rear doors
05
The controls are located on the rear inside
edges of the doors, and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
1. Remove the key blade from the remote
control, see page 120.
2. Turn the control with the key blade.
The door cannot be opened from the
inside.
The door can be opened from the inside.
129
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm (option)
The alarm system
•
The alarm indicator light
The alarm is automatically armed whenever the
car is locked with the remote control, or if a
front lock button is depressed.
When armed, the alarm continuously monitors
a number of points on the car. The following
conditions will trigger the alarm:
05
130
The tailgate is forced open.
A door is forced open.
The ignition switch is tampered with
An attempt is made to start the car with a
non-approved key (a key not coded to the
car's ignition).
•
If there is movement in the passenger compartment (if the car is equipped with the
optional movement sensor).
•
The car is lifted or towed (if the car is equipped with the optional inclination sensor)
•
The battery is disconnected (while the
alarm is armed).
•
The siren is disconnected when the alarm
is disarmed.
1
Arming the alarm
The hood is forced open.
G020227
•
•
•
•
•
Fault in the alarm system: If a fault has
been detected in the alarm system, a message will be shown in the information display. Contact your Volvo retailer to have
the alarm system inspected and repaired if
necessary.
Press the LOCK button on the remote control,
or press the central lock button on one of the
front doors with the door open. One long flash
of the turn signals will confirm that the alarm is
armed.
Disarming the alarm
Alarm indicator light
The status of the alarm system is indicated by
the indicator light on at the top of the dashboard (see the illustration):
•
•
Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed
•
The indicator light flashes rapidly before
the ignition is switched on – the alarm has
been triggered. The message "ALARM
TRIGGERED, CHECK CAR" will also be
displayed.
The indicator light flashes every two seconds – the alarm is armed
On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, press in the start control in the ignition switch.
Press the UNLOCK button on the remote control or insert the key in the ignition1 to disarm
the alarm. Two short flashes from the car's
direction indicators confirm that the alarm has
been deactivated and that all doors are
unlocked.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm (option)
Turning off (stopping) the alarm
If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by
pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote
control or by inserting the key in the ignition
switch. The driver's door must first be
unlocked with the key blade.
Temporarily turning off the accessory
alarm sensor(s)
In certain situations it may be desirable to turn
off the accessory inclination and movement
alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your
vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the
boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in
the vehicle with the doors locked.
To do so:
NOTE
1. Press MENU to enter the menu system and
scroll to Car settings (for a more detailed
description of the menus, see page 82.
On vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive, the start control must be
removed from the ignition switch before the
key can be inserted, see page 146 for
instructions.
2. Select Reduced guard.
3. Select Activate once and the message
Reduced guard – See manual will
appear in the information display. The
alarm sensors will be turned off when the
vehicle is locked.
Audible/visual alarm signal
An audible alarm signal is given by a battery
powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for
30 seconds.
or
Select Ask on exit. Each time the ignition
key is turned to position 0, the message
Press ENTER to reduce guard until
engine is started. Press EXIT to
cancel will be displayed. Select one of the
alternatives:
G026313
NOTE
The visual alarm signal is given by flashing
all turn signals and turning on the interior
lighting for approximately 5 minutes.
05
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Menu navigation controls
•
if the alarm sensors are to be deactivated,
press ENTER and then lock the vehicle.
The next time the ignition key is turned to position II, the sensors will be reactivated and Full
guard will displayed.
``
131
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm (option)
or
If you do not wish to deactivate the sensors, do
not choose an alternative and lock the vehicle
or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.
CAUTION
05
•
The accessory sensors are automatically reconnected to the alarm system
the next time the vehicle is unlocked
and then locked again.
•
This function will not turn off the vehicle's standard alarm.
U.S.A. FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation
is subject to the following conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
132
05 Locks and alarm
05
133
134
136
140
143
144
146
147
148
149
151
152
153
155
157
159
160
162
163
164
168
G020912
General information...............................................................................
Fuel requirements.................................................................................
Ignition switch.......................................................................................
Starting the vehicle...............................................................................
Starting the vehicle with keyless drive (option as available).................
Manual transmission, 5-speed (certain markets only)..........................
Manual transmission, 6-speed (certain markets only)..........................
Automatic transmission (option)...........................................................
Shiftlock override..................................................................................
All Wheel Drive (option).........................................................................
Brake system........................................................................................
Stability system.....................................................................................
Towing...................................................................................................
Jump starting........................................................................................
Towing a trailer......................................................................................
Detachable trailer hitch.........................................................................
Transporting loads................................................................................
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option......................................
Park assist (Option/accessory).............................................................
STARTING AND DRIVING
06
06 Starting and driving
General information
Economical driving conserves natural
resources
Better driving economy may be obtained by
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops
and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to
immediate traffic conditions.
Observe the following rules:
•
•
Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle
for driving short distances. This does not
allow the engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
•
Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration
and hard braking.
•
Use the transmission's Drive (D) position
as often as possible and avoid using kickdown.
•
•
Do not exceed posted speed limits.
•
Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when tires are cold).
•
Remove snow tires when threat of snow or
ice has ended.
06
136
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature as soon as possible by driving
with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for
the first few minutes of operation. A cold
engine uses more fuel and is subject to
increased wear.
Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra
load) in the vehicle.
•
Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,
increase air resistance and also fuel consumption.
•
At highway driving speeds, fuel consumption will be lower with the air conditioning
on and the windows closed than with the
air conditioning off and the windows open.
•
Using the onboard trip computer's fuel
consumption modes can help you learn
how to drive more economically.
Other factors that decrease gas mileage
are:
•
•
•
•
Dirty air cleaner
Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter
Dragging brakes
Incorrect front end alignment
Some of the above mentioned items and others
are checked at the standard maintenance
intervals.
WARNING
Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with
the tailgate open could lead to poisonous
exhaust gases entering the passenger compartment. If the tailgate must be kept open
for any reason, proceed as follows:
1. Close the windows.
2. Set the ventilation system control to air
flow to floor, windshield and side windows and the blower control to its highest setting.
Weight distribution affects handling
At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a
tendency to understeer, which means that the
steering wheel has to be turned more than
might seem appropriate for the curvature of a
bend. This ensures good stability and reduces
the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that
these properties can alter with the vehicle load.
The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less
the tendency to understeer.
06 Starting and driving
General information
Handling, roadholding
Driving through water
Take particular care when driving through
flowing water.
•
Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water
•
When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.
WARNING
After driving through water, press lightly on
the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes
are functioning normally. Water or mud can
make the brake linings slippery, resulting in
delayed braking effect.
1
•
Engine damage will occur if water is
drawn into the air cleaner.
•
If the vehicle is driven through water
deeper than 9 in (25 cm), water may
enter the differential and the transmission. This reduces the oil's lubricating
capacity and may shorten the service
life of these components.
•
The vehicle can be driven through water up to
a depth of approximately 9 in. (25 cm), at a
maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
•
Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must
not be mixed.
CAUTION
Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure
all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check
that the tires are inflated to the recommended
pressure according to the vehicle load. See the
"Tire pressure" section. Loads should be distributed so that capacity weight or maximum
permissible axle loads are not exceeded.
•
Do not allow the vehicle to stand in
water up to the door sills longer than
absolutely necessary. This could result
in electrical malfunctions.
•
Volvo recommends using only genuine
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.
Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvo
engine coolant to help protect your vehicle
during cold weather.
•
Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
prevents the formation of condensation in
the tank. In addition, in extremely cold
weather conditions it is worthwhile to add
fuel line de-icer before refueling.
•
The viscosity of the engine oil is important.
Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves
cold-weather starting as well as decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is
warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, particularly the synthetic type1, is recommended. Be sure to use good quality oil but
do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving
or in warm weather, see page 269 for more
information.
If the engine has been stopped while the
car is in water, do not attempt to restart
the engine. Have the car towed out of
the water.
Cold weather precautions
If you wish to check your vehicle before the
approach of cold weather, the following advice
is worth noting:
•
Make sure that the engine coolant contains
50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture
will reduce freeze protection. This gives
protection against freezing down to –31 °F
(–35 °C). See section "Coolant". The use of
"recycled" antifreeze is not approved by
•
06
The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc. are used more often.
Moreover, the capacity of the battery
decreases as the temperature drops. In
very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is therefore advisable to check the state of charge
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.
``
137
06 Starting and driving
General information
more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil
on the battery posts.
•
•
06
•
Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving – see
the chapter "Wheels and tires."
To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from
freezing, add washer solvents containing
antifreeze (see page 215 for the location of
the washer fluid reservoir). This is important since dirt is often splashed on the
windshield during winter driving, requiring
the frequent use of the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1
part washer solvent and 4 parts water
Down to 5° F (–15° C): 1 part washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0° F
(–18° C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts
water Down to –18° F (–28° C): 1 part
washer solvent and 1 part water.
Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
NOTE
Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.
2
138
Conserving electrical current
NOTE
Keep the following in mind to help minimize
battery drain:
•
•
•
When the engine is not running, avoid turning the ignition key to position II. Many
electrical systems (the audio system, the
optional navigation system, power windows, etc) will function with the ignition key
in position I. This position reduces drain on
the battery.
Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc that consume a great deal
of current when the engine is not running
could result in the battery being completely
drained.
The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo
area (certain models only) provides electrical current even with the ignition switched
off, which drains the battery.
•
If the ignition is switched on, a warning
message will be displayed in the text
window in the instrument panel when
the battery charge is low.
•
An energy conserving function
designed into the vehicle's electrical
system will switch off certain functions
or reduce the load on the battery by,
e.g., reducing the audio system's volume.
Before a long distance trip
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked at a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before driving long distances.
Your trained and qualified Volvo service technician will also be able to supply you with
bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for
your use in the event that problems occur.
As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:
•
Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption is normal.
•
•
•
Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage
Have the transmission oil level checked2.
Check condition of drive belts.
To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle's transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle's transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.
06 Starting and driving
General information
•
•
Check state of the battery's charge.
•
The brakes, front wheel alignment, and
steering gear should be checked by your
Volvo retailer only.
•
•
Check all lights, including high beams.
•
Have a word with your Volvo retailer if you
intend to drive in countries where it may be
difficult to obtain the correct fuel.
•
Consider your destination. If you will be
driving through an area where snow or ice
are likely to occur, consider snow tires.
Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
well), and replace those that are worn.
Check tire pressures.
Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
06
139
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
Octane rating
engine's capacity, and for the smoothest possible operation.
Minimum octane
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a
difference in engine operation is noticeable.
G028920
Fuel Formulations
Typical pump octane label
Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane or above will not
affect engine reliability.
06
Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated
horsepower, torque, and fuel economy performance using premium 91 octane fuel.
Demanding driving
In demanding driving conditions, such as operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,
or driving for extended periods at higher altitudes than normal, it may be advisable to
switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to
change gasoline brands to fully utilize your
140
Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.
Besides damaging the exhaust emission control systems on your vehicle, lead has been
strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
where you must fill your own gas tank, take
precautions. These may include:
•
standing upwind away from the filler nozzle
while refueling
•
refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth
of the filler neck during refueling
•
wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.
Use of Additives
With the exception of gas line antifreeze during
winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or other store-bought additives to your
vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.
Overuse may damage your engine, and some
of these additives contain organically volatile
chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself
to these chemicals.
WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched
on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone
rings, this may cause a spark that could
ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and
injury.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes
inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger
compartment is ventilated, and immediately
return the vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for correction.
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
Deposit control gasoline (detergent
additives)
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits. Detergent
gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and
intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit
control gasolines will help ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station operator.
NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of
store-bought fuel injector cleaning additives.
tiveness of the emission control system and
could result in loss of emission warranty coverage. State and local vehicle inspection programs will make detection of misfueling easier,
possibly resulting in emission test failure for
misfueled vehicles.
NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain
an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission
Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) located on your instrument panel may light. If this occurs, please
return your vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for maintenance.
Unleaded fuel
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter
and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and
Canadian regulations require that pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps have nozzles which
fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled
"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline
damages the three-way catalytic converter and
the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated
use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effec-
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
require that the service pump be marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
there are areas in which the pumps are
unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check
with the service station operator. To meet seasonal air quality standards, some areas require
the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Volvo allows the
use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed on this page
must still be met. Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels
containing up to 10% ethanol by volume may
be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as
Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". Ethers – MTBE:
Fuels containing up to 15% MTBE may be
used.
Fuel filler door
Press the button on the light switch panel (see
the illustration on page 61) with the ignition
switched off to unlock the fuel filler door.
Please note that the fuel filler door will remain
unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the
fuel filler door relocks.
If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is
being refueled, this feature enables you to lock
the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel filler
door unlocked.
06
You can also keep the vehicle locked if you
remain inside it during refueling. The central
locking button does not lock the fuel filler door.
Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and
is completely closed after refueling. Open the
fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather.
``
141
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
Refueling
The fuel tank is designed to accommodate
possible expansion of the fuel in hot weather,
see page 267 for fuel tank volume. Be aware
that the "usable" tank capacity will be somewhat less than the specified maximum. When
the fuel level is low, such factors as ambient
temperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure"
characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuel
pump's ability to supply the engine with an
adequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advisable to refuel as soon as possible when the
needle nears the red zone, or when the fuel
warning light comes on.
CAUTION
•
Do not refuel with the engine running1.
Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the
ignition is on, an incorrect reading could
occur in the fuel gauge
•
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap
by turning it clockwise until it clicks into
place.
•
Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
press the handle on the filler nozzle
more than one extra time. Too much
fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions
can cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling could also cause damage to the
emission control systems.
•
Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.
In addition to causing damage to the
environment, gasolines containing
alcohol can cause damage to painted
surfaces, which may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Do not use gasolines containing methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).
This practice can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel system.
Such damage may not be covered
06
1
142
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle’s
performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.
06 Starting and driving
Ignition switch
Ignition switch positions
0 – Locked position
Remove the key to lock the
steering wheel1. Never turn
the key to position 0 while
driving or when the vehicle is
being towed.
II – Drive position
The key's position when driving. The vehicle's entire electrical system is activated.
III – Start position
NOTE
A ticking sound may be audible if the key is
turned to a position between 0 and I. To
stop this sound, turn the key to position II
and back to position 0.
I – Intermediate position2
Turn the key to this position
and release it immediately.
The key returns automatically
to the Drive position.
A chime will sound if the key
is left in the ignition and the
driver's door is opened (does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive).
Certain accessories, radio,
etc. on, daytime running lights
off.
1
2
06
Automatic transmission: the gear selector must be in the Park position. The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed.
Please be aware that leaving the key in this positions I or II will increase battery drain.
143
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
To start the engine
WARNING
Before starting, check that the seat, steering
wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly.
Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat if
necessary.
pedal, turn the key to position III and
release it. The starter motor will then operate automatically (for up to ten seconds)
until the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start, repeat this step.
1. Fasten the seat belt.
4. To release the gear selector from the Park
(P) position, the engine must be running (or
the ignition key must be in position II) and
the brake pedal must be depressed.
2. Apply the parking brake if not already set.
The gear selector should be locked in the
Park (P) position (Shiftlock). See also page
151.
5. Select the desired gear. On models with an
automatic transmission, the gear engages
after a very slight delay which is especially
noticeable when selecting R.
NOTE
•
Immobilizer: If two of the keys to your
vehicle are close together, e.g., on the
same key ring when you try to start the
vehicle, this could cause interference in
the immobilizer system and result in the
vehicle not starting. If this should occur,
remove one of the keys from the key
ring before trying to start the vehicle
again.
•
Keylock: Models equipped an automatic transmission have a keylock system. When the engine is switched off,
the gear selector must be in the Park
(P) position before the key can be
removed from the ignition switch1.
•
When starting in cold weather, the
transmission may shift up at slightly
higher engine speeds than normal until
the automatic transmission fluid reaches normal operating temperature.
•
Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. Oil flow may not reach
some lubrication points fast enough to
prevent engine damage.
Manual transmission: The clutch must be
fully depressed.
NOTE
After a cold start, idle speed may be noticeably higher than normal for a short period.
This is done to help bring components in the
emission control system to their normal
operating temperature as quickly as possible, which enables them to control emissions and help reduce the vehicle's impact
on the environment.
06
3. The vehicle is equipped with an autostart
feature. Without touching the throttle
1
144
The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed from the ignition switch.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
WARNING
Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be firmly
secured in the clips on the floor so that they
cannot slide and become trapped under the
pedals on the driver's side.
•
Always place the gear selector in Park
(P) (manual transmission: first or reverse
gear) and apply the parking brake
before leaving the vehicle.and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattended
with the engine running.
•
Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to
ensure adequate ventilation. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but
very poisonous.
06
CAUTION
Automatic transmission: The engine
should be idling when you move the gear
selector. Never accelerate until after you
feel the transmission engage! Accelerating
immediately after selecting a gear will cause
harsh engagement and premature transmission wear. Selecting P or N when idling
at a standstill for prolonged periods of time
will help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid.
145
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle with keyless drive (option as available)
Starting a vehicle with keyless drive
NOTE
A keyless drive remote control must be
inside the vehicle in order to start the
engine.
1. Press the brake pedal (the clutch pedal
must also be fully depressed on models
with a manual transmission).
Starting a vehicle with keyless drive
06
Keyless drive makes it possible to unlock, start
and lock the vehicle without using a remote
control.
A start control is fitted in the ignition switch on
vehicles equipped with the optional keyless
drive. This control is used in the same way as
the ignition key to start the engine. See also
page 144 for general information on starting
the engine.
146
G019420
G019410
2. Press in the keyless drive start control and
turn it to position III.
NOTE
The vehicle is equipped with an autostart
function that makes it possible to start the
engine without holding the start control in
position III. Turn the start control to position
III and release it. The starter motor will then
operate automatically (for up to ten seconds) until the engine starts.
Starting the vehicle with the ignition key
(remote control)
A vehicle with keyless drive can also be started
with the ignition key (if, for example, the battery
in the keyless drive remote control is weak). To
do so:
Removing the keyless drive start control
1. Press the catch on the side of the start
control (see the illustration).
2. Pull the keyless drive start control out of
the ignition switch.
3. Insert the remote control into the ignition
switch and turn it to position III to start the
engine. See also page 144 for complete
starting information.
06 Starting and driving
Manual transmission, 5-speed (certain markets only)
5-speed manual transmission (option
on certain models)
Engaging reverse gear, 5-speed
transmission
CAUTION
Never shift into reverse while moving forward.
WARNING
Depress the clutch pedal completely when
changing gears1.
Remove your foot from the clutch pedal while
driving. The shift pattern should be followed.
Overdrive (5th gear) should be used as often as
possible to help improve fuel economy.
1
G018257
G018256
An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause
the accelerator, brake, and/or clutch pedal
to catch. Check that the movement of these
pedals is not impeded. Not more than one
protective floor covering may be used at
one time.
Reverse gear should only be engaged from a
complete stop.
06
NOTE
Reverse gear is electronically blocked to
help prevent it from being selected while the
vehicle is moving foward.
Clutch interlock: The clutch must be fully depressed before you can start your car. If the clutch is not depressed, it will not be possible to start the engine.
147
06 Starting and driving
Manual transmission, 6-speed (certain markets only)
6-speed manual transmission (option
on certain models)
Engaging reverse gear, 6-speed
transmission
CAUTION
Never shift into reverse while moving forward.
WARNING
Depress the clutch pedal completely when
changing gears1.
06
Remove your foot from the clutch pedal while
driving. The shift pattern should be followed.
Overdrive (5th and 6th gears) should be used
as often as possible to help improve fuel economy.
1
148
G018259
G018258
An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause
the accelerator, brake, and/or clutch pedal
to catch. Check that the movement of these
pedals is not impeded. Not more than one
protective floor covering may be used at
one time.
Reverse gear should only be engaged from a
complete stop.
NOTE
Reverse gear is electronically blocked to
help prevent it from being selected while the
vehicle is moving foward.
Clutch interlock: The clutch must be fully depressed before you can start your car. If the clutch is notdepressed, it will not be possible to start the engine.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission (option)
Shiftgate positions
Gear selector positions
R – Reverse
P – Park
The car must be stationary when shifting to
position R.
Select the P position when starting or parking.
In P, the transmission is mechanically blocked
(Shiftlock). Always apply the parking brake
when parking.
N – Neutral
N is the neutral position. The engine can be
started, but no gear is selected. Apply the parking brake when the car is stationary with the
gear selector in N.
NOTE
G020237
If the gear selector is in the Neutral position
and the vehicle has been at a standstill for
at least 3 seconds, the brake pedal must be
pressed before the gear selector can be
moved to another position.
Depress the button on the front of the gear
selector knob to move the selector between
the R, N, D, and P positions.
G018264
The gear selector can be moved freely between
the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D)
positions while driving.
In order to move the gear selector to another
position:
D - left position: automatic shifting, M - right position: manual shifting
CAUTION
The car must be stationary when selecting
position P.
1
1. Turn the ignition key to position II (if the
engine is not already running).
06
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Move the gear selector to the desired position.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. The Drive position offers 5 forward gears1. The car automatically shifts between the various forward gears,
T5 models have 6 forward gears.
``
149
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission (option)
the engine. If the current speed is too high
for using a lower gear, the downshift will
not occur until the speed has decreased
enough to allow the lower gear to be used.
based on the level of acceleration and speed.
The car must be at a standstill when shifting to
position D from position R.
Manual shifting – Geartronic
•
The manual shifting mode (Geartronic) can be
selected at any time to manually select forward
gears, including while the car is moving.
Cold starts (turbo engines)
NOTE
Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot be
selected in Geartronic mode.
•
•
To access the Manual (M) shifting position
from Drive (D), move the gear selector to
the right to M.
To return to the Drive (D) position from M,
move the gear selector to the left.
06
While driving
150
•
If you select the M position while driving,
the gear that was being used in the Drive
position will also initially be selected in the
M position.
•
Move the gear selector forward (toward
"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward
(toward "–") to shift to a lower gear.
•
If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the
transmission will downshift one gear at a
time and will utilize the braking power of
If you slow to a very low speed, the transmission will automatically shift down.
When driving before the engine has reached its
normal operating temperature, the transmission will shift up at slightly higher engine
speeds to heat the three-way catalytic converter as quickly as possible.
Kickdown
Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) is
achieved by depressing the accelerator pedal
fully and briskly. An upshift will occur when
approaching the top speed for a particular gear
or by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly.
Kickdown can be used for maximum acceleration or when passing at highway speeds.
Safety function
To help prevent excessive engine speeds (rpm)
that could lead to engine damage, the engine
management system includes a function that
prevents kickdown from taking place if the
engine speed is too high.
Kickdown will not occur if the driver attempts
to use this function when engine speeds are
too high. The transmission will remain in the
currently selected gear.
06 Starting and driving
Shiftlock override
Overriding the shiftlock system
4. Insert the key blade, see page 120, into the
opening and press it down until it bottoms.
G018263
5. With the key blade pressed down, move
the gear selector out of the P position.
Shiftlock prevents the gear selector from being
moved out of Park unless the ignition key is in
position II and the brake pedal is depressed.
In certain cases it may be necessary to move
the gear selector from the Park position manually.
06
To manually override the Shiftlock
system:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. There is a small cover below P-R-N-D on
the gear selector panel. Open the rear edge
of the panel.
151
06 Starting and driving
All Wheel Drive (option)
All Wheel Drive (AWD) – general
information
Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent
All Wheel Drive (option), which means that
power is distributed automatically between the
front and rear wheels. Under normal driving
conditions, most of the engine's power is
directed to the front wheels. However, if there
is any tendency for the front wheels to spin, an
electronically controlled coupling distributes
power to the wheels that have the best traction.
Tire dimensions
06
Volvo recommends that you always drive on
tires of the same brand, size, construction
(radial), tread pattern, load, speed, traction,
temperature, and treadwear rating. Never drive
on mixed tires, except for brief periods when
the temporary spare tire is in use.
Always use properly inflated tires of correct
dimensions. Tire size and inflation pressures
are shown on a placard located on the driver's
side B-pillar (the structural member at the side
of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening). See also page 178 for the tire inflation pressure tables beginning, .
152
Temporary Spare
The temporary spare tire is for temporary, lowspeed, short-distance use only. Replace it with
a full-sized tire as soon as possible. Do not
drive on the temporary spare at speeds above
50 mph (80 km/h).
Never install snow chains on a temporary
spare.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
Brake circuit malfunction
The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two separate brake circuits. If a problem should occur in one of these circuits, it is
still possible to stop the vehicle with the other
brake circuit.
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pressure,
the stopping distance will be longer.
A warning light in the instrument panel will light
up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.
If this light comes on while driving or braking,
stop immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir.
NOTE
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain
pressure on the pedal – do not pump the
brakes.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir or if a brake system message is
shown in the information display, DO NOT
DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a Volvo
retailer and have the brake system inspected.
Power brakes function only when the
engine is running
The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure
which is only created when the engine is running. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the
engine switched off.
If the power brakes are not working, the brake
pedal must be pressed approximately five
times harder than usual to make up for the lack
of power assistance. This can happen for
example when towing your vehicle or if the
engine is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The brake pedal feels harder than usual.
Water on brake discs and brake pads
affects braking
Driving in rain and slush or passing through an
automatic car wash can cause water to collect
on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a
delay in braking effect when the pedal is
depressed. To avoid such a delay when the
brakes are needed, depress the pedal occasionally when driving through rain, slush, etc.
This will remove the water from the brakes.
Check that brake application feels normal. This
should also be done after washing or starting
in very damp or cold weather.
Severe strain on the brake system
The brakes will be subject to severe strain
when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or
when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually
slower, which means that the cooling of the
brakes is less efficient than when driving on
level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,
shift into a lower gear and let the engine help
with the braking. Do not forget that if you are
towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to
a greater than normal load.
Anti-lock brakes (ABS)
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to
improve vehicle control (stopping and steering)
during severe braking conditions by limiting
brake lockup. When the system "senses"
impending lockup, braking pressure is automatically modulated in order to help prevent
lockup that could lead to a skid.
06
The system performs a self-diagnostic test
when the engine is started and when the
vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal will
pulsate several times and a sound may be
audible from the ABS control module. This is
normal.
``
153
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
For optimal ABS braking effect:
1. Press down on the brake pedal with full
force. The pedal will pulsate.
2. Steer the vehicle in the direction of travel
and keep the brake pedal depressed.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)
EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system.
EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to the
rear brakes to help provide optimal braking
capacity.
06
The switching of the ABS modulator will be
audible and the brake pedal will pulsate during
braking. Please be aware that ABS does not
increase the absolute braking potential of the
vehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABS
will not shorten stopping distances on slippery
surfaces.
If the warning lamp lights up there is a malfunction of the ABS system (the standard braking system will still function) and the vehicle
should be driven cautiously to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technicianfor inspection.
154
WARNING
If the BRAKES and ABS warning symbols
light at the same time, there may be a problem in the brake system. If the brake fluid
level is normal in these circumstances, drive
carefully to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician to have the brake system
checked.
NOTE
•
When the EBA system is activated, the
brake pedal will go down and pressure
in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. You must
maintain full pressure on the brake
pedal in order to utilize the system completely. There will be no braking effect if
the pedal is released. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal
is released.
•
When the vehicle has been parked for
some time, the brake pedal may sink
more than usual when the engine is
started. This is normal and the pedal will
return to its usual position when it is
released.
Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA
EBA is designed to provide full brake effect
immediately in the event of sudden, hard braking. The system is activated by the speed with
which the brake pedal is depressed.
When the EBA system is activated, the brake
pedal will go down and pressure in the brake
system immediately increases to the maximum
level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal
in order to utilize the system completely. EBA
is automatically deactivated when the brake
pedal is released.
06 Starting and driving
Stability system
Stability Traction Control (STC)/
Dynamic Stability Traction Control
(DSTC)
Temporarily switching off Spin control
1. Turn the thumbwheel (A) on the left-side
steering wheel lever until the STC/DSTC
menu is displayed.
The stability system consists of a number of
functions designed help reduce wheel spin,
counteract skidding, and to generally help
improve directional stability.
2. Hold down the RESET button (B) to toggle
between STC/DSTC SPIN CONTROL
ON or OFF.
A pulsating sound will be audible when the
system is actively operating and is normal.
STC
DSTCA
TC
X
X
SC
X
X
AYC
A
X
Option on certain models.
Traction control – TC
This function is designed to help reduce wheel
spin by transferring power from a drive wheel
that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the
opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).
TC is most active at low speeds.
This is one of the stability system's permanent
functions and cannot be switched off.
1
•
The message STC/DSTC SPIN
CONTROL OFF indicates that the stability system's spin control function has
temporarily been switched off.
•
The stability control indicator light
will illuminate and remain on until spin
control has been reactivated.
•
The spin control function is automatically enabled each time the engine is
started.
G020349
Function/
system
NOTE
A - thumb wheel, B - RESET button
Spin control (SC)
The spin control function is designed to help
prevent the drive wheels from spinning while
the vehicle is accelerating.
Under certain circumstances, such as when
driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to
temporarily switch off this function for maximum tractive force1.
06
• STC/DSTC ON indicates that all system functions are active.
Active yaw control – AYC (DSTC only)
This function helps maintain directional stability, for example when cornering, by braking
one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows
a tendency to skid or slide laterally.
Models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) have an integrated traction control function that cannot be disabled. DSTC is optional on AWD models.
``
155
06 Starting and driving
Stability system
This is one of the stability system's permanent
functions and cannot be switched off.
Information symbol
WARNING
The car's handling and stability characteristics will be altered if the STC/DSTC system
functions have been disabled.
STC/DSTC-related messages in the text
window
• "TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF" – The system has been temporarily
switched off due to high brake temperature
and will automatically switch on again
when the brakes have cooled.
•
06
"ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED" – the
system has been automatically disengaged due to a fault. A trained and qualified
Volvo service technician should check the
system.
If the
and
symbols light up at the same
time, read the message in the display.
If only the
symbol lights up, this indicates
one of the following situations:
•
The light illuminates for approximately
2 seconds to indicate that the system is
performing a self-diagnostic test when the
engine is started.
•
If the light flashes while driving, this indicates that the stability system is actively
functioning to help counteract wheel spin
and/or a skid.
•
If this light stays on after the engine has
started or comes on while driving, there
may be a fault in the stability system. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
•
If Spin control has been intentionally
switched off, a message is displayed and
the light will stay on as a reminder that this
function has been disabled by the driver.
Symbols used by the stability system
Stability system indicator light
156
WARNING
The stability system is intended to help
improve driving safety. It supplements, but
can never replace, the driver's judgement
and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always
be adapted to traffic and road conditions.
06 Starting and driving
Towing
Emergency towing
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet
should be removed and returned to its storage
space. Press the cover back into position.
WARNING
Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the
vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.
G021297
Towing a vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground
The towing eyelet is located under the floor of
the cargo area. This eyelet must be screwed
into the positions provided on the right sides of
either the front or rear bumper (see the illustration).
WARNING
Volvo does not recommend towing a disabled vehicle behind another vehicle. Significant difficulty in steering and braking,
combined with unfavorable weather, traffic,
and road conditions may make it impossible
to maintain vehicle control.
2. Screw the towing eyelet in place first by
hand and then using the tire iron until it is
securely in place.
3. Turn the ignition key to position II.
4. Place the gear selector in neutral. For vehicles with automatic transmissions, follow
instruction on page 151, "Shiftlock override" to allow the gear selector to be moved
from the Park position.
5. Keep firm pressure on the brake pedal
while releasing the parking brake.
6. When towing has been completed, return
the gear selector to Park (automatic) or
Reverse (manual) and apply the parking
brake.
The following points should also be
observed:
•
1. Apply the parking brake.
To attach the towing eyelet:
1. Press the mark on the lower edge of the
cover (1) to open it.
cle at a standstill, great effort will be
required to turn the steering wheel.
WARNING
Towing a vehicle with a locked steering
wheel will make the vehicle impossible to
steer.
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Never
exceed local towing speed limits and heed
all local towing restrictions.
•
•
Never tow farther than 50 miles (80 km).
•
The disabled vehicle should be towed in
the forward direction only.
06
Keep the tow rope taut at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
2. Insert the key into the ignition to unlock the
steering wheel. The steering wheel must be
unlocked. With the engine off and the vehi``
157
06 Starting and driving
Towing
WARNING
•
Never allow a vehicle to be towed without a driver behind the wheel of the
disabled vehicle.
•
Never remove the key from the ignition
while the vehicle is moving. The steering
wheel could lock, making it impossible
to steer the vehicle.
•
When the engine is not running, steering
resistance and the effort needed to
apply the brakes will be great.
•
Never attempt to tow a vehicle with a
dead battery at night.
Towing vehicles with front wheel drive
Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equipment for towing vehicles with front wheel drive.
If wheel lift equipment must be used, please
use extreme caution to help avoid damage to
the vehicle.
06
•
158
Check with state and local authorities
before attempting this type of towing,
as vehicles being towed are subject to
regulations regarding maximum towing
speed, length and type of towing
device, lighting, marker flags, etc.
Never attempt to push- or tow-start a
vehicle with a dead battery. This would
inject unburned fuel into the three-way
catalytic converter(s), causing overheating, backfiring, and damage, see
page 159 for instructions on jump starting the vehicle.
•
Remember that the power brakes and
power steering will not function when
engine is not running. The braking and
steering systems will function but the
brake pedal pressure required is
3 – 5 times above normal and greater
steering effort must be exerted.
•
The towing eyelets must not be used for
pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for
any similar purpose involving severe
strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to
pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow
truck.
In this case, the vehicle should be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible.
If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle
with the front wheels on the ground, please
refer to the towing information on the previous
page.
•
Sling-type equipment applied at the front
will damage radiator and air conditioning
lines.
•
It is equally important not to use sling-type
equipment at the rear or apply lifting equipment inside the rear wheels; serious damage to the rear axle may result.
•
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelets must not be used
to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator.
CAUTION
•
WARNING
06 Starting and driving
Jump starting
3. Connect the auxiliary battery's negative (–)
terminal (3) to the ground point in your
vehicle's engine compartment near the
driver's side spring strut (4).
4. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,
then start the engine in the vehicle with
dead battery.
G020298
5. After the engine has started, first remove
the negative (–) terminal jumper cable.
Then remove the positive (+) terminal
jumper cable.
Follow these instructions to jump start your
vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another
vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the
12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another
vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touching to prevent premature completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not connect the jumper cable to any part
of the fuel system or to any moving parts.
Avoid touching hot manifolds.
•
Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
•
Do not touch the jumper cables during
the attempt to start the vehicle. This
could cause sparks.
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to personal
injury.
06
To jump start your vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive
(+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal in
your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a
"+" sign.
159
06 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
General information
•
Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer
hitches that are specially designed for the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Models equipped with the B5244S7 engine
(engine code 39 , which is the 6th and
7th digits from the left in your vehicle's VIN
number, see page 262 for the location of
the VIN plate), may not be used to tow trailers or vehicles of any kind. This could cause
damage to the vehicle's emission control
systems.
Trailer towing does not normally present any
particular problems, but take into consideration:
•
Increase tire pressure to recommended
full. See the chapter "Wheels and tires."
•
When your vehicle is new, avoid towing
heavy trailers during the first 620 miles
(1,000 km).
•
Maximum speed when towing a trailer:
50 mph (80 km/h).
•
Maximum trailer weights recommended by
Volvo are:
06
160
Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant
temperature should be closely watched
when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain.
Use a lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if the temperature gauge needle
enters the red range.
•
Trailers without brakes: 1,540 lbs
(700 kg).
•
•
Trailers with brakes: 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
Observe the legal requirements of the
state/province in which the vehicles are
registered.
If the automatic transmission begins to
overheat, a message will be displayed in
the information display.
•
Avoid overload and other abusive operation.
•
Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability, and economy.
•
It is necessary to balance trailer brakes
with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a
safe stop (check and observe state/local
regulations).
•
Do not connect the trailer's brake system
directly to the vehicle's brake system.
•
The maximum recommended hitch
tongue load is 165 lbs (75 kg).
•
All Volvo models are equipped with
energy-absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer hitch installation should not
interfere with the proper operation of this
bumper system.
•
More frequent vehicle maintenance is
required.
•
Remove the ball and drawbar assembly
when the hitch is not being used.
•
Volvo recommends the use of synthetic
engine oil when towing a trailer over long
distances or in mountainous areas.
WARNING
•
Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
not be used on Volvos, nor should
safety chains be attached to the
bumper.
•
Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle's
rear axle must not be used.
•
Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to the vehicle
brake system, nor a trailer's lighting
system directly to the vehicle lighting
system. Consult your nearest trained
and qualified Volvo service technician
for correct installation.
•
When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety
wire must be correctly fastened to the
hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch
on the vehicle. The safety wire should
never be fastened to or wound around
the drawbar ball.
06 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
NOTE
•
When parking the vehicle with a trailer
on a hill, apply the parking brake before
putting the gear selector in Park (P) or
in reverse on models with a manual
transmission. Always follow the trailer
manufacturer's recommendations for
wheel chocking.
•
If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, or if the
vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, make sure the gear you select
does not put too much strain on the
engine (using too high a gear).
•
The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may
be rated for trailers heavier than the
vehicle is designed to tow. Please
adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer
weights.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines
exceeding 15%.
06
161
06 Starting and driving
Detachable trailer hitch
Installing the ball holder
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end
of the locking bolt.
Removing the ball holder
1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt
and slide the locking bolt out of the ball
holder/hitch assembly.
C
E
A
B
G010496
D
2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly.
Ball holder
Locking bolt
Cotter pin
Hitch assembly
06
Safety wire attachment
1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt
out of the hitch assembly.
2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one
in the hitch assembly.
4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch
assembly/ball holder.
162
NOTE
A cover for the hitch assembly is also
included in the kit.
06 Starting and driving
Transporting loads
Loading the vehicle
Your vehicle's load-carrying capacity is affected by factors such as:
•
•
•
the number of passengers
•
the amount of cargo.
•
tire inflation
•
the amount of optional or accessory equipment installed
See the chapter "Wheels and tires" for more
detailed information.
Before loading the car, turn off the engine, and
apply the parking brake when loading or
unloading long objects. The gear selector can
be inadvertently knocked out of position by
long cargo, causing the car to move.
Keep the following in mind when
loading the vehicle:
•
Load objects in the cargo area against the
rear seat backrest.
•
•
•
Load heavy cargo as low as possible.
•
•
Cover sharp edges on the load.
Seats can be folded down and head
restraints removed to extend the cargo
compartment, see page 111.
•
Remember that an object weighing
44 lbs (20 kg) produces a force of
2,200 lbs (1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h)!
Never exceed the rack manufacturer's
weigh limits and never exceed the maximum rated roof load of 165 lbs (75 kg).
•
Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
evenly.
•
Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
load.
•
Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured.
•
Remember that the car's center of gravity
and handling change when you carry a
load on the roof.
•
The car's wind resistance and fuel consumption will increase with the size of the
load.
•
Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast
cornering and hard braking.
When the rear backrest(s) are folded
down, the vehicle should not be loaded
to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below
the upper edge of the rear side windows. Objects placed higher than this
level could impede the function of the
Volvo Inflatable Curtain.
Load carriers (accessory)
Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories. Follow the installation instructions supplied with the load carriers.
Observe the following points when using load
carriers:
•
To avoid damaging your car and to achieve
maximum safety when driving, we recommend using the load carriers that Volvo has
developed especially for your car.
•
Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
designed to carry the maximum allowable
roof load for this vehicle: 165 lbs (75 kg).
For Non-Volvo roof racks, check the manufacturer's weight limits for the rack.
Center wide loads.
Secure all cargo with restraining straps
anchored to the load securing eyelets.
WARNING
06
163
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option
G020295
WARNING
BLIS camera
Indicator light
06
BLIS symbol
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an
information system that indicates the presence
of another vehicle moving in the same direction
as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind
area".
CAUTION
The BLIS system should only be repaired by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
164
•
BLIS is an information system, NOT a
warning or safety system.
•
BLIS does not eliminate the need for
you to visually confirm the conditions
around you, and the need for you to turn
your head and shoulders to make sure
that you can safely change lanes.
•
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes in a safe manner.
The system is based on digital camera technology. The cameras (1) are located beneath
the side-view mirrors.
When one (or both) of the cameras have
detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to
approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of
your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.
(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), the
indicator light in the door panel (2) illuminates.
The light will glow continuously to alert the
driver of the vehicle in the blind area.
NOTE
The door panel indicator light illuminates on
the side of the vehicle where the system has
detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is
passed on both sides at the same time, both
lights will illuminate.
B
A
G020296
Introduction
A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters), B = approx. 31 ft.
(9.5 meters)
BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the
driver if a fault should occur with the system.
For example, if one or both of the system's
cameras are obscured, a message (see the
table on page 167) will appear in the information display in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,
the system can be temporarily switched off (for
instructions see page 166).
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option
When does BLIS function
Darkness
The system functions when your vehicle is
moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding
vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a
vehicle in the blind area must have its headlights on. This means, for example, that the
system will not detect a trailer without headlights that is being towed behind a car or truck.
When you pass another vehicle:
The system reacts when you pass another
vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)
faster than that vehicle.
WARNING
•
BLIS does not react to cyclists or
mopeds.
•
BLIS does not react to vehicles that are
standing still.
•
The function of the BLIS cameras may
be affected by intense light, or when
driving at night in areas where there are
no external sources of light (e.g., street
lights, other vehicles, etc.). In such
cases, the system may react as if the
cameras were obscured.
•
In both of the above mentioned conditions, a message will appear in the information display.
•
When driving in such conditions, the
system's function will be limited or it
may be temporarily switched off, see
page 166 for instructions.
•
When the message is no longer displayed, BLIS will return to normal function.
•
The BLIS cameras have the same limitation as the human eye. In other words,
their "vision is impaired" by adverse
weather conditions such as heavy
snowfall, dense fog, etc.
When you are passed by another vehicle:
The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by
another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph
(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.
WARNING
•
•
BLIS does not function in sharp curves.
•
If you are towing a wide trailer, this may
prevent the BLIS cameras from detecting other vehicles in adjacent lanes.
BLIS does not function when your vehicle is backing up.
How BLIS functions in daylight and
darkness
Daylight
BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect
motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,
motorcycles, etc.
06
``
165
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option
Limitations
CAUTION
G018177
In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)
may illuminate even when there are no other
vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occasionally even when there are no other vehicles in the blind area, this does not indicate
a fault in the system.
The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,
smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on
a highway
•
Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
scratching.
•
The lenses are electrically heated to
help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gently brush away snow from the lenses.
Switching BLIS on and off
In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.
service required will be displayed.
G018178
The following are several examples of situations in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may
illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low
on the horizon
06
Light reflected from a wet road surface
In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera
lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped
clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.
G018270
G018176
Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses
BLIS button (left button in the illustration)
BLIS is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lights will
provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.
•
166
The system can be switched off by pressing the BLIS button in the center console.
The indicator light in the button goes out
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option
when the system is switched off, and a text
message is displayed.
•
BLIS can be switched on again by pressing
the button. The indicator light in the button
will illuminate and a new text message will
be displayed. Press the READ button, see
page 58, to erase the message.
BLIS system messages
Text in the
display
System status
BLIS service
required
BLIS not functioning
properly. Contact an
authorized Volvo service technician.
BLIS camera
blocked
BLIS camera obscured.
Clean the lenses.
BLIS ON
BLIS system on
BLIS OFF
BLIS system off
BLIS reduced
function
The BLIS cameras'
function has been
reduced by e.g., fog, or
strong sunlight directly
into the camera. The
camera will reset itself
when these conditions
have changed. have
been function reduced
06
167
06 Starting and driving
Park assist (Option/accessory)
Introduction
WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT a
safety system. This system is designed to
be a supplementary aid when parking the
vehicle. It is not, however, intended to
replace the driver's attention and judgement.
G020294
Function
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started. The indicator light in the button in the center console illuminates.
•
The front park assist system is active from
the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately
10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the
vehicle is backing up.
•
Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been
selected.
Front/rear park assist
06
The park assist system is designed to assist
you when driving into parking spaces, garages,
etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located
in one or both bumpers to measure the distance to a vehicle, object or a person who may
be close to the front or rear of your vehicle.
Park assist is available in two versions:
•
•
168
Rear bumper only
Front and rear bumpers
Rear park assist
The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comes
from the rear speakers.
The system must be deactivated when towing
a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted
carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park
assist system's sensors.
NOTE
Rear park assist is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine
trailer wiring is used.
Front park assist
The distance monitored in front of the vehicle
is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal comes from the audio system's front
speakers.
It may not be possible to combine auxiliary
headlights and front park assist since these
lights could trigger the system's sensors.
06 Starting and driving
Park assist (Option/accessory)
Activating/deactivating park assist
NOTE
•
Front park assist is disengaged automatically when the parking brake is
applied.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with front and
rear park assist, both systems will be
deactivated by pressing the button.
G021267
Audible signals from the park assist
system
Park Assist button (lright button in the illustration)
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started.
•
Press the Park assist button on the center
console to temporarily deactivate the system(s). The indicator light in the button will
go out when the system has been deactivated.
•
Park assist will be automatically reactivated the next time the engine is started, or if
the button is pressed (the indicator light in
the button will illuminate).
The Park Assist system uses an intermittent
tone that pulses faster as you come close to an
object, and becomes constant when you are
within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object
in front of or behind the vehicle. If the volume
of another source from the audio system is
high, this will be automatically lowered.
If there are objects within this distance both
behind and in front of the vehicle, the signal
alternates between front and rear speakers.
Faults in the system
If the information symbol illuminates and PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED is shown
on the information display, this
indicates that the system is not
functioning properly and has been disengaged.
Consult a Volvo retailer or authorized Volvo
service technician.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound
sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include
such things as the horns of other vehicles,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does
not indicate a fault in the system.
06
``
169
06 Starting and driving
Park assist (Option/accessory)
G020770
Cleaning the sensors
Park assist sensors
06
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and a suitable car washing detergent.
Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause
incorrect warning signals.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system.
170
06 Starting and driving
06
171
172
174
176
178
179
180
182
183
185
186
187
188
189
190
192
197
G020918
General information...............................................................................
Tire inflation...........................................................................................
Inflation pressure—U.S. models ..........................................................
Inflation pressure—Canadian models ..................................................
Tire designations...................................................................................
Glossary of tire terminology..................................................................
Vehicle loading......................................................................................
Uniform tire quality gradings.................................................................
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires................................................
Temporary spare...................................................................................
Wheel nuts............................................................................................
Tire rotation...........................................................................................
Changing a wheel.................................................................................
Tire Sealing System .............................................................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).............................................
WHEELS AND TIRES
07
07 Wheels and tires
General information
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening), or on the inside of the fuel filler door
on Canadian models.
CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel combination designed to provide maximum dry
pavement performance with consideration
for hydroplaning resistance. As such, they
may be more susceptible to road hazard
damage and, depending on driving conditions, may achieve a tread life of less than
20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWD
or DSTC system, these tires are not
designed for winter driving, and should be
replaced with winter tires when weather
conditions dictate.
07
The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces.
Certain models are equipped with "all-season"
tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree
of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires
without the "all-season" rating. However, for
174
optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered
roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on
all four wheels.
WARNING
•
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling. Approved tire sizes
are shown in the Tire inflation pressure
tables, see page 178.
•
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.
When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires
are the same size designation, type (radial) and
preferably from the same manufacturer, on all
four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering
the car's roadholding and handling characteristics.
Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
on rims), they should be suspended off the
floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
their sides or standing upright, but should not
be suspended.
CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be stored
in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,
etc.
07 Wheels and tires
General information
Tread wear indicator
New Tires
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of 2000, the
manufacturing week and year
(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g. 1502
means that the tire illustrated
was manufactured during week 15 of 2002).
•
•
Tire wear increases with speed.
•
Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy
and driving comfort.
•
Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
•
When replacing tires, the tires with the
most tread should be mounted on the rear
wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer
during hard braking.
•
Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.
G020323
Tire age
The tires have wear indicator strips running
across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI
are printed on the side of the tire. When
approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the
tread, these strips become visible and indicate
that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less
than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor traction.
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size
as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the
same make (manufacturer) will prevent alteration of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent
high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V)
exposure can accelerate the aging process.
Correct front wheel alignment is very
important.
You should replace the spare tire when you
replace the other road tires due to the aging of
the spare.
A tire's age can be determined by the DOT
stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).
A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration
should be replaced immediately.
07
Improving tire economy
•
Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tire
pressure tables, see page 178.
•
Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard
braking and tire screeching.
175
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
Inflation labels
Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
G032520
G032513
WARNING
Tire inflation placard on Canadian models
Tire inflation placard on U.S. models
Check tire inflation pressure regularly.
07
Tables listing the recommended inflation pressure for your vehicle can be found on page
178. A tire inflation pressure placard is also
located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the
rear of the driver's door opening). This placard
indicates the designation of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits
and inflation pressure.
NOTE
The placards shown indicate inflation pressure for the tires installed on the car at the
factory only.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare, at least once a month
and before long trips. You are strongly urged
to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure
for optimum tire performance and wear.
176
•
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation,
or "blowout," with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury.
•
Under-inflated tires reduce the load carrying capacity of your vehicle.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire
inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree
temperature drop causes a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check
your tire pressures frequently and adjust them
to the proper pressure, which can be found on
the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
Checking tire pressure
Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when the
tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the
car has been parked for at least 3 hours.
After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If
you have to drive farther than this distance to
pump your tire(s), check and record the tire
pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold
pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
To check inflation pressure:
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,
then firmly press the tire gauge onto the
valve.
2. Add air to reach the recommended air
pressure
Speed ratings
3. Replace the valve cap.
The speed ratings in the tables translate as follows:
4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
M = 81 mph (130 km/h), V= 149 mph (240 km/
h), W= 168 mph (270 km/h)
5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there
are no nails or other objects embedded
that could puncture the tire and cause an
air leak.
See also page 180 for an explanation of the
designations on the sidewall of the tire.
6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are
no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregularities.
NOTE
•
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center
of the valve. Then recheck the pressure
with your tire gauge.
•
Some spare tires require higher inflation
pressure than the other tires. Consult
the tire inflation tables, see page 178,
or see the inflation pressure placard.
07
Load ratings
The load ratings in the tables above translate
as follows:
91 = 1365 lbs (615 kg), 93 = 1433 lbs (650 kg),
99 = 1709 lbs (755 kg)
177
07 Wheels and tires
Inflation pressure—U.S. models
Tire inflation pressure table
The following tire pressures are recommended
by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-
Tire size
tion placard for information specific to the tires
installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Cold tire pressure up to five persons psi (kPa)
Front
Rear
205/55R16 91V M+S
32 (220)
32 (220)
205/50R17 93V
35 (240)
35 (240)
35 (240)
35 (240)
61 (420)
61 (420)
Extra Load M+S
215/45R18A 93W
Extra load
Temporary spare tire
T125/85R16 99M
A
07
178
Tires of this type may not be mounted on vehicles equipped with the optional self-leveling system.
07 Wheels and tires
Inflation pressure—Canadian models
Tire inflation pressure table
The following tire pressures are recommended
by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-
Tire size
tion placard for information specific to the tires
installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Cold tire pressures
Optional pressure
Up to five persons
Up to three personsA
psi (kPa)
psi (kPa)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
205/55R16 91V M+S
36 (250)
36 (250)
30 (210)
30 (210)
205/50R17 93V Extra Load
M+S
36 (250)
36 (250)
35 (240)
32 (220)
215/45R18 93W Extra
loadB
36 (250)
36 (250)
35 (240)
32 (220)
Temporary spare tire
61 (420)
61 (420)
61 (420)
61 (420)
T125/85R16 99M
A
B
Optional pressure may not be used for homologation of fuel consumption or emissions.
Tires of this type may not be mounted on vehicles equipped with the optional self-leveling system.
07
179
07 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
Tire designations
7
9
6
8
5
10
4
11
3
12
1
G026442
2
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the sidewall
of all tires (see the illustration).
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
The tire designation (the following figures are
examples of a tire designation):
07
215: The width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.
65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width.
R: Radial tire.
180
15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).
M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All
Terrain, AS = All Season
95: The tire's load index. In this example, a
load index of 95 equals a maximum load of
1521 lbs (690 kg).
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code
and the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week
of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are
marketing codes used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information helps a tire
manufacturer identify a tire for safety recall
purposes.
H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
speed at which the tire is designed to be
driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and
with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
NOTE
This information may not appear on the tire
because it is not required by law.
Tire Ply Composition and Material Used:
Indicates the number of plies indicates or
the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire
information placard or the safety certification label, located on the B-Pillar or the
driver's door or on the inside of the fuel filler
door on Canadian models, for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades: See page 185 for more information.
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: The greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load,
radial tubeless, etc.
07
181
07 Wheels and tires
Glossary of tire terminology
Terminology
•
•
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer.
•
Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
•
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load
at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tires load
carrying capability.
•
07
182
Tire information placard: A placard
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire
sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
and the maximum weight the vehicle can
carry.
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tires load carrying capability.
•
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
•
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
•
B-pillar: The structural member at the side
of the vehicle behind the front door.
•
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next
to the rim.
•
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
•
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.
•
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or
a tire and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
•
Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This
rating is established by the tire manufacturer.
•
Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure
that should ever be put in the tire. This limit
is set by the tire manufacturer.
•
Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that are
mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
inflation pressure is affected by the number
of occupants in the car, the amount of
cargo, and the speed at which the vehicle
will be driven for a prolonged period. This
information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's side
B-pillar or on the inside of the fuel filler door
on Canadian models, and in the tire inflation table in this chapter.
•
Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same temperature
as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the car
has been parked for at least 3 hours.
Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance.
07 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
Loading the vehicle
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire information placard:
Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must
never exceed its maximum permissible weight.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.
NOTE
•
The location of the various labels in your
vehicle can be found on page 262.
•
A table listing important weight limits for
your vehicle can be found on page
265.
Capacity weight
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo
weight.
NOTE
For trailer towing information, please refer to
the section "Towing a trailer", see
page 160.
Permissible axle weight
The maximum allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian
1
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
(4) The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400–750 (5×150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
(1) Locate the statement "the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
07
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
See "Towing a trailer"
``
183
07 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
WARNING
07
184
•
Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other
weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent deformation or catastrophic failure.
•
Do not use replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the tires
that were original equipment on the
vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the originals do
not increase the vehicle's GVW rating
limitations.
07 Wheels and tires
Uniform tire quality gradings
Uniform tire quality gradings
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE
GRADES
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is
not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.
WARNING
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and tire failure.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering
(turning) traction.
Temperature A
TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and many depart significantly from the norm due to variation in driving
habits, maintenance practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
TRACTION
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
TEMPERATURE
The temperature grades are AA (the highest),
A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of performance that
all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
07
185
07 Wheels and tires
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires
Snow chains
•
Check local regulations regarding the
use of snow chains before installing.
•
•
•
Always follow the chain manufacturer's
installation instructions carefully. Install
chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.
Do not mix tires of different design as this
could also negatively affect overall tire road
grip.
•
Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads
in warm weather. They should be removed
when the winter driving season has ended.
•
Studded tires should be run-in 300–
600 miles (500–1000 km) during which the
car should be driven as smoothly as possible to give the studs the opportunity to
seat properly in the tires. The tires should
have the same rotational direction
throughout their entire lifetime.
•
Snow chains should be installed on front
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved
snow chains.
If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires
and wheels are installed and are of a size
different than the original tires and wheels,
chains in some cases CANNOT be used.
Sufficient clearances between chains and
brakes, suspension and body components
must be maintained.
•
Some strap-on type chains will interfere
with brake components and therefore
CANNOT be used.
•
All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
should only be installed on the front
wheels. Only chains adapted for AWD
models should be used.
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow
chain information.
•
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed limit. (Under
no circumstances should you exceed
31 mph (50 km/h).
•
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
•
The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well
as locked wheel braking.
Snow tires, studded tires
Tires for winter use:
•
Owners who live in or regularly commute
through areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions are strongly
advised to fit suitable winter tires to help
retain the highest degree of traction.
•
It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during
cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-
07
186
ure to do so could reduce traction to an
unsafe level or adversely affect handling.
CAUTION
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with
the following restrictions:
NOTE
Please consult state or provincial regulations restricting the use of studded winter
tires before installing such tires.
07 Wheels and tires
Temporary spare
Temporary spare
The spare tire in your car is called a "Temporary
Spare".
Recommended tire pressure (see the placard
on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should
be maintained irrespective of which position on
the car the temporary spare tire is used on.
In the event of damage to this tire, a new one
can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It
must be replaced as soon as possible by a
standard tire. Road holding and handling
may be affected with the "Temporary
Spare" in use. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph (80 km/h) with the "Temporary
Spare" in use.
CAUTION
The car must not be driven with wheels of
different dimensions or with a spare tire
other than the one that came with the car.
The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your car's transmission.
07
187
07 Wheels and tires
Wheel nuts
Wheel nuts
WARNING
Never use the short type of nut for aluminium wheels. This could cause the wheel to
come loose.
Aluminum wheels – high nut
Only the high type of nut can be used for aluminum wheels. This is considerably different
from other types of nut because it has a rotating conical thrust washer.
G020324
NOTE
Low nut.
High nut.
There are two different types of wheel nut,
depending on whether the wheels are steel or
aluminum.
Steel rims – low nut
07
188
Steel rims are normally secured using the low
type of nut, although steel rims may also use
the high type.
This nut can also be used on steel wheels.
Lockable wheel nut
If steel wheels with lockable wheel nuts are
used in combination with wheel covers, the
lockable wheel nut must be fitted to the stud
nearest the air valve. The wheel cover cannot
otherwise be installed on the wheel.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire rotation
•
Contact a Volvo workshop if you are
unsure about the tread depth.
Tire rotation
Your vehicle has no recommended tire rotation. The following information is intended to
help you understand why.
G020325
Tread set
The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the
tire
Summer and winter tires
•
When switching between summer and
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate
where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,
LF = left front, RR = right rear
•
Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the
sidewall.
•
Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's
braking properties and ability to force
aside rain, snow and slush.
•
The tires with the most tread should always
be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skidding).
As a tire ages and the rubber cures, front and
rear tires set at different angles. Therefore, if
tires are rotated, the tread will eventually set at
an angle that is a compromise. Even if ride,
handling, and road noise may still seem
acceptable, they may not be optimal. Further,
tires that are rotated, but not on a regular basis,
may actually cause more tire noise, faster tire
wear, and unpleasant changes in steering feel
and vehicle handling.
an aid in detecting a suspension problem. Each
tire, if left in place, tells a story about the suspension. Tire rotation, on the other hand, could
make suspension wear harder to detect. Early
detection is very important, because suspension problems can make tire wear worse.
If you do rotate your tires…
Please follow the tire manufacturer's recommendations, as outlined in the tire manufacturers tire warranty pamphlet.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance
based on your particular driving circumstances.
A tire that can fully adapt to its position will
provide better steering feel, lower tire noise,
and better fuel economy.
Braking stability performance
Your vehicle is driven mainly by the front tires,
which will wear faster. This can be beneficial.
Having more tread on the rear tires will help
reduce oversteer. Oversteer is when a vehicle
wants to keep turning because of momentum
and dynamic forces on its suspension.
07
Suspension wear diagnostics
Every suspension needs periodic inspection
and maintenance. A tire's wear pattern can be
189
07 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
The spare tire, jack, and crank are located
under the carpet on the floor of the cargo area.
To change a tire:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Put the gear selector in Park (P) or reverse
on models with a manual transmission.
07
3. Block the wheels that are on the ground
with wooden blocks or large stones.
4. Remove the wheel cap (where applicable)
using the lug wrench in the tool bag.
190
5. With the car still on the ground, use the lug
wrench to loosen the wheel nuts 1/2–1 turn
by exerting downward pressure. Turn the
nuts counterclockwise to loosen.
6. There are two jack attachment points on
each side of the car. Position the jack correctly in the attachment (see the illustration)
and crank while simultaneously guiding the
base of the jack to the ground. The base of
the jack must be flat on a level, firm, nonslippery surface. Before raising the car,
check that the jack is still correctly positioned in the attachment.
G024531
G020332
G020331
Changing a wheel
Jack attachment points
7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is lifted off the ground.
8. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and
carefully remove the wheel so as not to
damage the threads on the studs.
07 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
•
The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.
•
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface.
•
Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a car supported by a
jack.
•
Use the jack intended for the car when
changing a tire. For any other job, use
stands to support the car.
•
Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position or
reverse on models with a manual transmission.
•
Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.
•
The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.
•
No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.
Installing the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
The jack (certain models) and tools should be
returned to their correct storage places after
use.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.
•
On vehicles equipped with a jack and
spare wheel, the jack should be cranked
down to the position shown in the illustration.
•
On vehicles equipped with the tire sealing
system, the jack should be cranked down
as far as possible and returned to its storage position in the foam block.
3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten handtight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to
81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm).
5. Install the wheel cap (where applicable).
Returning the jack to its storage space
WARNING
The jack and any tools should always be
returned to their proper storage compartments after use to help keep them securely
in place in the event of sudden braking, etc.
07
G029335
WARNING
191
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
Introduction
The system consists of an air compressor, a
container for the sealing compound, wiring to
connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical
system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a
hose used to connect the system to the tire’s
inflation valve.
The 12-volt sockets are located in the front
tunnel console and on the rear side of the tunnel console, in the rear seat.
NOTE
•
The tire sealing system is only intended
to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not
the sidewall.
•
Tires with large holes or tears cannot be
repaired with the tire sealing system.
WARNING
•
After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
•
Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible to determine if it can
be permanently repaired or must be
replaced.
Accessing the tire sealing system
The tire sealing system is stowed under the
floor of the cargo area. To access it:
•
1. Fold up or remove any carpet or other floor
covering.
2. Open the floor hatch.
3. Lift out the tire sealing system.
07
Tire sealing system–overview
•
The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.
After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers and sudden stops.
G020400
Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing
system that enables you to temporarily seal a
hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,
or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.
Speed limit sticker
On/Off switch
Electrical wire
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Protective hose cover
Air release knob
Hose
Bottle with sealing compound
Air pressure gauge
192
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:
•
•
The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol
and natural rubber-latex. These substances are harmful if swallowed.
•
Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.
If irritation persists, get medical attention.
•
Tire sealing system–temporarily
repairing a flat tire
Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is
then driven a short distance to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.
NOTE
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,
etc.) from the tire before using the sealing
system.
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.
•
Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.
Precautions:
•
•
•
Keep out of reach of children.
•
WARNING
Do not ingest the contents.
•
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.
Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.
•
Hands should be washed thoroughly
after handling.
Keep the tire sealing system away from
children.
•
Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
•
Apply the parking brake.
First aid:
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the
upper and lower eyelids. Get medical
attention if symptoms occur.
Stage 1: Sealing the hole
G014338
•
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two
stages:
07
1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.
2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it
to the steering wheel hub where it will be
clearly visible to the driver.
``
193
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
4. Put on the gloves included in the tire sealing system.
WARNING
Contact with the sealing compound may
cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash
the affected area immediately with soap and
water.
7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the tire sealing system’s hose connector onto the valve as
tightly as possible by hand.
5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle
of sealing compound.
8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.
07
194
WARNING
The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep
it securely in place and help prevent sealing
compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
9. Start the vehicle’s engine.
10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor
by pressing the on/off switch to position I.
WARNING
•
Never stand next to the tire being inflated
when the compressor is in operation.
•
If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.
•
If there is visible damage to the sidewall
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.
The vehicle should not be driven if this
occurs. Contact a towing service or
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if
applicable.
NOTE
The air pressure gauge will temporarily
show an increase in pressure to approximately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is being pumped into the tire. The
pressure should return to a normal level
after approximately 30 seconds.
11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch
off the compressor briefly to get a clear
reading from the pressure gauge. The
compressor should not be used for more
than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8
bar) after approximately seven minutes, turn
off the compressor. In this case, the hole is
too large to be sealed and the vehicle should
not be driven.
12. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the sealing compound in the tire.
the tire by turning the air release knob
counterclockwise.
NOTE
•
•
Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be used
again to check the tire’s inflation pressure.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle
holder. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician to have the
bottle removed and properly disposed
of.
WARNING
If you interrupt your trip for more than 1
hour, check the inflation pressure in the
damaged tire again before continuing.
WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering
behavior, or noises should occur while driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a
safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,
cracks, or other visible damage, and
recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure
is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue
driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure
Replacing the sealing compound
container
The sealing compound container must be
replaced if:
•
the tire sealing system has been used to
repair a tire
•
the container’s expiration date has passed
(see the date on decal).
07
1. Connect the tire sealing system as described in stage 1.
2. Refer to the inflation pressure tablesfor the
correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs
to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s
compressor. If necessary, release air from
``
195
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
NOTE
•
•
After use, the sealing compound bottle,
the hose, and certain other system
components must be replaced. Please
consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts.
If the sealing compound bottle’s expiration date has passed, please take it to
a Volvo retailer or a recycling station
that can properly dispose of harmful
substances.
Inflating tires
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate
the tires. To do so:
1. Park the car in a safe place.
2. The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.
07
4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the hose connector
onto the valve as tightly as possible by
hand.
5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
196
6. Start the vehicle’s engine.
WARNING
•
•
The vehicle’s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure
the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated
place, or outdoors, before using the system.
Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle when the engine is running.
7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the
gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to
get a clear reading from the pressure
gauge.
8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to
be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s
compressor (press the on/off switch to
position I). If necessary, release air from the
tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached.
10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the
12-volt socket.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Introduction
The tire pressure monitoring system uses sensors mounted in the tire valves to check inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit
inflation pressure data to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
NOTE
USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS
will light up the tire pressure warning light (also
referred to as a telltale) in the instrument panel,
and will display a message in the text window.
The wording of this message is determined by
the degree of inflation pressure loss.
NOTE
If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
07
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv``
197
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
•
•
•
TPMS indicates low tire pressure but
does not replace normal tire maintenance. For information on correct tire
pressure, please refer to the tables
beginning, see page 178, or consult
your Volvo retailer.
The tire pressure warning light will not
identify which tire is underinflated. Be
sure to check all four tires.
A certain amount of air seepage from
the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes
in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly.
WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire
failure, resulting in a loss of control of the
vehicle.
Please note the following when changing or
replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/
tires on the vehicle:
•
Only the factory-mounted wheels are
equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS
sensor.
•
If wheels without TPMS sensors are mounted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed
each time the vehicle is driven above
25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
inflation pressure of all four tires.
07
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure
(consult the tire pressure placard or the
tables, see page 178 ).
3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to
drive the vehicle for several minutes at a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This
198
NOTE
•
If you change to tires with a different
recommended inflation pressure, the
TPMS system must be recalibrated to
these tires. This must be done by an
authorized Volvo retailer or workshop.
•
If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sensor is moved to another wheel, the sensor's seal, nut, and valve core should be
replaced.
•
When installing TPMS sensors, the
vehicle must be parked for at least
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
TPMS error message will be displayed.
Changing wheels with TPMS
Erasing warning messages
When a low tire pressure warning message has
been displayed, and the tire pressure warning
light has come on:
Volvo does not recommend moving sensors back and forth between sets of
wheels.
will erase the warning text and the warning
light will go out.
NOTE
•
Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,
the warning message should not reappear.
If the message is still displayed, drive the
vehicle for several minutes at a speed of
20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the
message.
•
Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be
fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.
CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press
the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the
valve to help avoid bending or otherwise
damaging the valve.
07 Wheels and tires
07
199
200
G020920
Washing and cleaning the car............................................................... 202
Paint touch up....................................................................................... 206
CAR CARE
08
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the car
Washing the car
•
Tar spots can be removed with kerosene
or tar remover after the car has been
washed.
•
A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper
blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility
considerably and also helps prolong the
service life of the wiper blades.
The following points should be kept in mind
when washing and cleaning the car:
•
•
•
202
Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.
Doing so may cause detergents and wax
to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid
scratching, use lukewarm water to soften
the dirt before you wash with a soft
sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.
Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork
as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish
may be permanently damaged.
•
A detergent can be used to facilitate the
softening of dirt and oil.
•
A water-soluble grease solvent may be
used in cases of sticky dirt. However, use
a wash place equipped with a drainage
separator.
•
08
The car should be washed at regular intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots
adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently
in the wintertime when salt has been used
on the roads.
Dry the car with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the
doors and rocker panels.
•
Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel
housings, fenders, etc).
•
In areas of high industrial fallout, more frequent washing is recommended.
•
After cleaning the engine, the spark plug
wells should be inspected for water and
blown dry if necessary.
NOTE
When washing the car, remember to remove
dirt from the drain holes in the doors and
sills.
Exterior components
Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning
products, available at your Volvo retailer, for
cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental
components such as chromed strips on the
exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for
using these products should be followed care-
fully.Solvents or stain removers should not be
used.
CAUTION
•
Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components
•
Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface
•
Polishes containing abrasive substances should not be used
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the car
CAUTION
•
During high pressure washing, the
spray mouthpiece must never be closer
to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not
spray into the locks.
•
Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
Clean the headlights regularly, for
example when refueling.
•
When washing or steam cleaning the
engine, avoid spraying water or steam
directly on the electrical components or
toward the rear side of the engine.
•
Always close the moonroof (option) and
sun shade before washing your vehicle.
•
Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the moonroof.
•
Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the moonroof.
Keeping the underbody clean is most important, especially in the winter. Some automatic
washers do not have facilities for washing the
underbody.
CAUTION
•
•
•
Before driving into an automatic car
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor
to avoid damaging the windshield wipers.
Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any
antenna(s) are retracted or removed.
Otherwise there is risk of the machine
dislodging them
Chromed wheels: Clean chromeplated wheels using the same detergents used for the body of the vehicle.
Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can
permanently stain chrome-plated
wheels.
Automatic washing – simple and quick
We do NOT recommend washing your car in an
automatic wash during the first six months
(because the paint will not have hardened sufficiently).
•
An automatic wash is a simple and quick way
to clean your car, but it is worth remembering
that it may not be as thorough as when you
yourself go over the car with sponge and water.
When the car is driven immediately after
being washed, apply the brakes several
times in order to remove any moisture
from the brake linings.
•
Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This
constitutes a fire risk.
WARNING
Exterior lighting
Condensation may form temporarily on the
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as
headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand
moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short
time.
Polishing and Waxing
•
Normally, polishing is not required during
the first year after delivery, however, waxing may be beneficial.
•
Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can
be removed with kerosene or tar remover.
Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing
compound.
•
•
After polishing use liquid or paste wax.
•
Waxing alone does not substitute for polishing a dull surface.
•
A wide range of polymer-based waxes can
be purchased today. These waxes are easy
to use and produce a long-lasting, highgloss finish that protects the bodywork
against oxidation, road dirt and fading.
•
Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).
Several commercially available products
contain both polish and wax.
08
``
203
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the car
CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of longlife or durable paint protection coatings,
some of which may claim to prevent pitting,
fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have
not been tested by Volvo for compatibility
with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them
may cause the clear coat to soften, crack,
or cloud. Damage caused by application of
paint protection coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty.
Upholstery care
Fabric
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For
more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,
shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric
stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.
Interior plastic components
Cleaning interior plastic components should
be done with a cleaning agent specially
designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo
retailer.
Leather care
Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured
with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,
sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the
protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and
fading can result.
08
204
Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a
soft cloth and mild soap solution.
4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a
towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy
leather care kit formulated to clean and beautify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the
protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner
removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream
protectant restores a barrier against soil and
sunlight.
Protecting leather upholstery
Volvo also offers a special leather softener that
should be applied after the cleaner and protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and
reduces friction between leather and other finishes in the vehicle.
This will help the leather resist staining and
protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four
times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.
Cleaning leather upholstery
Alcantera™ suede-like material
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,
do not rub.
1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the
sponge with circular movements.
1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on
a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream
to the upholstery with light circular movements.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the car
CAUTION
•
Under no circumstances should gasoline, naphtha or similar cleaning agents
be used on the plastic or the leather
since these can cause damage.
•
Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring
can spread.
•
Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent can damage the seat padding.
•
Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.
•
Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing
may damage the textile upholstery.
•
Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may stain
the upholstery.
Cleaning floor mats
The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed
clean regularly, especially during winter when
they should be taken out for drying. Spots on
textile mats can be removed with a mild detergent. For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats.
Consult your Volvo retailer.
Cleaning the seat belts
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild
soap solution.
08
205
08 Car care
Paint touch up
Touching up minor paint damage
Minor stone chips and scratches
Paint damage requires immediate attention to
avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish
regularly - when washing the vehicle for
instance. Touch-up if necessary.
Material:
Paint repairs require special equipment and
skill. Contact a trained and authorized Volvo
service technician for any extensive damage.
Minor scratches can be repaired by using
Volvo touch-up paint.
•
•
•
•
NOTE
When touching up the vehicle, it should be
clean and dry. The surface temperature
should be above 60° F (15° C).
Primer – can
Paint – touch-up pen
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the metal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains, the touch-up paint can be
applied as soon as the spot has been
cleaned.
Brush
Masking tape
Deep scratches
Color code
G031024
G020345
1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any
loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
08
206
When ordering touch-up paint from your Volvo
retailer, make sure you have the right color.
Use the paint code indicated on the model
plate (1 in the illustration).
2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with
a small brush. When the primer surface is
dry, the paint can be applied using a brush.
Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin
paint coats and let dry after each application.
3. If there is a longer scratch, you may want
to protect surrounding paint by masking it
off.
08 Car care
08
207
208
210
212
214
215
216
218
220
221
223
230
G020922
Volvo maintenance................................................................................
Maintaining your car..............................................................................
Hood.....................................................................................................
Engine compartment.............................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids.....................................................................................................
Wiper blades.........................................................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Replacing bulbs....................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
09
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Volvo maintenance
General
Maintenance
Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance
program outlined in the Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet. This maintenance program contains inspections and services necessary for the proper function of your
vehicle. The maintenance services contain
several checks that require special tools and
training, and therefore must be performed by a
qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top
condition, specify time-tested and proven
Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance
with Volvo specifications. The maintenance
procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, many of
which will positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is
recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should also be
performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected.
The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle
manufacturers to furnish written instructions to
the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
servicing and function of the components that
control emissions. These services, which are
listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
Information" booklet, are not covered by the
warranty. You will be required to pay for labor
and material used.
Periodic maintenance helps minimize
emissions
Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehicle running well. Your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet provides a comprehensive periodic maintenance schedule up
to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle maintenance. The schedule includes components
that affect vehicle emissions. This page
describes some of the emission-related components.
Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian regulations, the following list of warranties
is provided.
•
•
•
•
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
•
•
Emission Design and Defect Warranty
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Systems Limited Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
These are the federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/provincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and
210
Service Records Information booklet for
detailed information concerning each of the
warranties.
Vehicle Event Data (Black Box)
Your vehicle's driving and safety systems
employ computers that monitor, and share
with each other, information about your vehicle's operation. One or more of these computers may store what they monitor, either during
normal vehicle operation or in a crash or nearcrash event. Stored information may be read
and used by:
•
•
Volvo Car Corporation
service and repair facilities
09 Maintenance and servicing
Volvo maintenance
•
•
09
law enforcement or government agencies
others who may assert a legal right to
know, or who obtain your consent to know
such information.
211
09 Maintenance and servicing
Maintaining your car
09
Owner maintenance
As needed:
Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.
•
The following points can be carried out
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services.
•
Wash the car, including the undercarriage,
to reduce wear that can be caused by a
buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be
caused by salt residues.
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake
vents at the base of the windshield, and
from other places where they may collect.
Each time the car is refueled:
•
•
Check the engine oil level.
Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.
NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase
or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
How Do States Use OBD II for Emission
Inspections?
Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
then read "faults." In some states, this type of
inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission
test.
How Can My Vehicle Fail OBD II Emission
Inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection for any of the following reasons.
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
•
If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your
part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.
Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending
on the inspection practices in your area.
•
If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
information may be incomplete and "not
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
ready may fail inspection.
Monthly:
•
212
Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.
Emission inspection readiness
•
Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min" and
"max" markings.
What is an Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II)?
•
Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
•
Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.
•
Visually inspect battery terminals for corrosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end
of its useful service life. Consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician for
additional information.
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnostic information about your vehicle's emission
controls. It can light the Check Engine light
(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A
"fault" is a component or system that is not
performing within an expected range. A fault
may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will
store a message about any fault.
How Can I Prepare for My Next OBD II
Emission Inspection?
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or
was lit but went out without service, have
09 Maintenance and servicing
Maintaining your car
09
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.
•
If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a
period of driving is necessary to bring the
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A
half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/highway driving is typically needed to allow
OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo
retailer can provide you with more information on planning a trip.
•
Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
your vehicle's maintenance schedule.
213
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Hood
G031032
Opening the hood
To open the hood:
1. Pull the lever located under the left side of
the dash to release the hood lock.
2. Lift the hood slightly.
3. Press up the release control located under
the front edge of the hood (at the center)
up to the right, and lift the hood.
WARNING
Check that the hood locks engage properly
when closed.
214
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
G026456
Engine compartment
Cooling system expansion tank
Relay/fuse box
Power steering fluid reservoir (concealed
behind the headlight)
Air cleaner
Dipstick – engine oil
Radiator
Cooling fan
WARNING
The cooling fan may start or continue to
operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine
has been switched off.
Washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
Battery
215
09 Maintenance and servicing
Engine oil
09
Changing engine oil and oil filter
See page 269 for oil specifications. Refer to
the Warranty and Service Records Information
booklet for information on the oil change intervals.
Volvo recommends Castrol.
Volvo does not recommend the use of
oil additives.
•
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
changed at the normal maintenance
intervals except at owner request and at
additional charge. Please consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Checking and adding oil
The oil level should be checked every time the
vehicle is refueled. This is especially important
during the period up to the first scheduled
maintenance service
•
•
216
The car should be parked on a level surface
when the oil is checked.
If the engine is warm, wait for at least 10–
15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off before checking the oil.
G020336
•
G020338
NOTE
Location of dipstick and oil filler cap
CAUTION
Checking the oil
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lintfree rag.
2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check
the oil level.
3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to
the MIN mark, add approximately
1 US quart (1 liter) of oil.
4. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
5. Switch off the engine and wait for at least
10–15 minutes and recheck the oil level. If
necessary, add oil until the level is near the
MAX mark.
•
Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the oil
level becomes too low.
•
Oil that is lower than the specified quality can damage the engine.
•
Always add oil of the same type and
viscosity as already used.
•
Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This
could cause an increase in oil consumption.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Engine oil
09
WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into
contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces
NOTE
Volvo uses different systems to indicate a
low oil level or pressure. Some models have
an oil pressure sensor, in which case a
warning symbol (see page 55) is used to
indicate low oil pressure. Other models have
an oil level sensor, in which case the driver
is alerted by the warning symbol in the center of the instrument panel and a text in the
information display. Some models use both
systems. Contact an authorized Volvo
retailer for more information.
217
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fluids
Coolant
G026425
Washer fluid
218
CAUTION
G020334
09
Washer fluid reservoir
Coolant reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment and holds approximately
6.8 US qts (6.5 liters). During cold weather, the
reservoir should be filled with windshield
washer solvent containing antifreeze.
Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
•
If necessary, top up the cooling system
with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze
only (a 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze).
•
Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.
•
If the cooling system is drained, it
should be flushed with clean water or
premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled
with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze.
•
The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the
level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there
can be high local temperatures in the
engine which could result in damage.
Check coolant regularly!
•
Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a
lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze.
•
Do not use chlorinated tap water in the
vehicles cooling system.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fluids
09
(280 °C), P/N 9437433
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle cools.
If it is necessary to top off the coolant when
the engine is warm, unscrew the expansion
tank cap slowly so that the overpressure
dissipates.
Brake fluid
Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.
When driving under extremely hard conditions
(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to
replace the fluid more often. Consult your
Volvo retailer. Always entrust brake fluid
changing to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Power steering fluid
The fluid level is checked at each service interval.
Fluid type: Volvo power steering fluid or equivalent.
Replace: No fluid change required.
G020333
WARNING
Brake fluid reservoir
The brake fluid should always be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. Check, without removing the cap, that
there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.
If a problem should occur in the power
steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still
possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep
in mind that greater effort will be required to
turn the steering wheel.
Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F
219
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Wiper blades
G014732
Tailgate wiper blade
G020330
Replacing windshield wiper blades
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull straight out (1), parallel with
the wiper arm.
2. Pull off the wiper blade from the attachment, toward the window.
3. Press the new wiper blade securely into
place.
Fold in the wiper arm.
3. Press a new wiper blade (2) until it clicks
into place.
Keeping the windshield/tailgate window and
wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and
prolongs the service life of the wiper blades.
See page 202 for washing instructions.
4. Ensure the blade is securely attached (3).
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than the one
on the passenger's side.
220
G020329
5. Fold in the wiper arm.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Battery
Battery maintenance
Driving habits and conditions, climate, the
number of starts, etc., all affect the service life
and function of the battery. In order for your
battery to perform satisfactorily, keep the following in mind:
Check the fluid level in each cell in the battery
every 24 months or every 15,0001 miles
(24,000 km), whichever is sooner.
•
Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.
•
If necessary, add distilled water. The level
should never be above the indicator.
•
The fluid level should be checked if the
battery has been recharged.
•
After inspection, be sure the cap over each
battery cell or the cover is securely in
place.
•
Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and properly tightened.
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running, or when the key is in the
ignition. This could damage the vehicle's
electrical system.
•
1
The battery should be disconnected from
the vehicle when a battery charger is used
directly on the battery.
WARNING
09
Corrosive
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
No smoking, no open flames,
no sparks
Battery symbols:
Wear protection goggles
Explosion
See owner's manual for
details
Battery replacement
Removing the battery
Keep away from children
1. Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching off
the ignition before disconnecting the battery so that all information in the vehicle's
electrical system can be stored in the control modules.
More frequently in warm climates.
``
221
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Battery
3. Remove the cover over the battery.
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
5. Disconnect the positive cable.
•
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
6. Remove the front side of the battery box
with a screwdriver.
7. Release the clamp holding the battery.
8. Lift out the battery.
Installing a new battery
1. Put the battery in place in the engine compartment.
2. Install the battery's retaining clamp.
3. Reinstall the front side of the battery box.
4. Connect the positive cable.
5. Connect the ground cable.
6. Reinstall the cover over the battery.
NOTE
Used batteries should be properly disposed
of at a recycling station or similar facility, or
taken to your Volvo retailer.
222
WARNING
4. Disconnect the battery negative (ground)
cable.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
Introduction
Removing the headlight housing
Before replacing bulbs in your vehicle, please
keep the following points in mind:
NOTE
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit
on the reflector, which will damage it.
The optional Bi-XenonŸ headlight bulbs
contain trace amounts of mercury. These
bulbs should always be disposed of by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
09
light, turn signal, and side marker bulbs. To lift
out the housing:
WARNING
•
The engine should not be running when
changing bulbs.
•
When changing in the headlight housing, if the engine has been running just
prior to replacing bulbs, please be
aware that components in the engine
compartment will be hot.
1. Remove the key from the ignition and turn
the headlight switch to position 0.
2. Open the hood.
3. Pull up the headlight housing's retaining
pin.
4. Pull out the headlight housing.
Certain bulbs should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician:
•
•
•
•
Courtesylighting
•
•
Brake lights
Reading lights
Glove compartment lights
G019599
Bi-XenonŸ headlights, Brake lights
G019600
Turn signals and courtesy lights in the
side door mirrors
The entire headlight housing must be lifted out
when replacing the high/low beam, parking
5. Disconnect the wiring connector by pressing down the clip with your thumb while at
the same time pulling the connector with
your other hand.
``
223
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Replacing bulbs
6. Lift out the headlight housing and place it
on a soft surface to avoid scratching the
lens.
Low beam bulb
CAUTION
When disconnecting the connector, pull on
the connector itself and not on the wiring.
WARNING
Bi-Xenon headlights (option) – due to the
high voltage used by these headlights,
these bulbs should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
G019133
G019131
After the defective bulb has been replaced,
reinsert the housing in the reverse order. Check
that the retaining pin is correctly inserted.
Low beam bulb
Cover with retaining clamps
Installing a new bulb
1. Open the hood and remove the headlight
housing (see page 223 for instructions).
1. Insert the new bulb. It can only be installed
in one position.
2. Release the retaining clamps on the cover.
2. Press the retaining spring inward and
upward and slightly to the right until it
snaps into place.
3. Release the bulb's retaining spring holding
the bulb in place by pressing it inward and
downward.
4. Pull out the bulb.
3. Press the wiring connector onto the bulb.
4. Put the plastic cover in place.
5. Press the retaining clamps back into place.
6. Reinstall the headlight housing (see
page 223).
224
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
High beam bulb (halogen)
WARNING
09
Parking light bulb
Bi-XenonŸ headlights (option) – due to the
high voltage used by these headlights, the
Bi-XenonŸ bulbs should only be replaced by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
4. Driver's side headlight: Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise.
Halogen high beam bulb
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight housing (see
page 223).
3. Remove the cover on the upper side of the
headlight housing by turning it counterclockwise.
NOTE
The halogen high beam bulb has a different
socket on vehicles equipped with BiXenonŸ headlights. On these models, pull
the bulb straight out.
5. Pull out the bulb holder and replace the
bulb.
G019145
G019136
Passenger's side headlight: Turn the bulb
holder clockwise.
6. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be
installed in one position.
1. Open the hood.
7. Reinstall the cover on the upper side of the
headlight housing by turning it clockwise.
2. Remove the headlight housing, see
page 223.
8. Reinstall the headlight housing (see
page 223).
3. Remove the cover on the upper side of the
headlight housing by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Pull out the bulb holder.
5. Replace the bulb.
6. Press the bulb holder back into position. It
will click into place.
7. Reinstall the cover on the upper side of the
headlight housing by turning it clockwise.
8. Reinstall the headlight housing.
``
225
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
1. Open the hood.
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight housing, see
page 223.
2. Remove the headlight housing, see
page 223.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove it.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,
pull it out, and replace the bulb.
4. Remove the bulb from the holder by pressing it in and twisting it counterclockwise.
4. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be
installed in one position.
5. Insert a new bulb and reinstall the bulb
holder in the headlight housing.
5. Reinstall the headlight housing.
6. Reinstall the headlight housing.
Front fog light (option)
G019605
Side marker light
G019150
Turn signal
G018050
09
1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to
position 0.
2. Remove the panel around the fog light
housing by inserting a screw driver as
shown in the illustration and pressing the
panel outward to release the retaining
clips.
3. Grasp the edge of the panel and pull it
straight out.
4. Unscrew the screw in the fog light housing
and remove it.
5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
226
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
6. Insert a new bulb by turning it clockwise
(the profile on the bulb holder will correspond with the profile in the base of the
bulb).
7. Reinsert the bulb holder. The mark TOP
should be upward.
2. Remove the covers (A or B) in the left/right
panels to access the bulb holders.
09
Location of taillight bulbs
3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the
affected bulb holder.
4. Press the catches together and pull out the
bulb holder.
5. Replace the defective bulb.
Removing the taillight bulb holder
6. Press the wiring connector back into position.
All bulbs in the taillight cluster can be replaced
from the cargo area. To access the bulb holders:
1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to
position 0.
1
G018058
G019166
7. Press the bulb holder into place and reinstall the cover.
Location of taillight bulbs
Brake light (LED)1
Taillight
Parking light
Turn signal
The wiring to the LED brake lights is permanently connected to the bulb holder. It should not be removed.
``
227
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Replacing bulbs
Back-up light
License plate lighting
Footwell lighting
Fog light (driver's side only)
NOTE
If the message indicating a burned out bulb
remains in the information display after the
bulb has been replaced, consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
G014849
These bulbs should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to
position 0.
2. Remove the screws with a screw driver.
3. Detach the lens (bulb housing) carefully.
4. Replace the defective bulb.
5. Reinstall the entire bulb housing and screw
it into place.
G020795
High-level brake light
The footwell lighting is located under the dashboard on the driver's and passenger's sides.
To replace a bulb:
1. Insert a screwdriver under the edge of the
lens. Turn the screwdriver gently to detach
the lens.
2. Remove the defective bulb.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Press the lens back into place.
228
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
Vanity mirror lighting
1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it gently to
detach the bulb housing.
2. Remove the defective bulb.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Press the bulb housing back into place.
6. Press the three lower lugs back into place.
G020253
G014852
Cargo area lighting
09
1. Insert a screwdriver under the center of the
lower edge of the mirror, turn it, and carefully pry up the lugs at the edge.
2. Move the screwdriver under the edge on
the left and right-hand sides (near the black
rubber sections) and pry carefully to
release the lower edge of the mirror.
3. Pry carefully and lift out the entire mirror
and the cover.
4. Remove the defective bulb and replace it
with a new one.
5. To reinstall the mirror, begin by pressing
the three lugs at the upper edge of the mirror back into place.
229
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fuses
Replacing fuses
There are relay/fuse boxes located in the
engine compartment and the passenger compartment.
If an electrical component fails to function, this
may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way
to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.
To do so:
1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult
to remove, special fuse removal tools are
located on the inside of the fuse box covers.
2. From the side, examine the curved metal
wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.
3. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of
the same color and amperage (written on
the fuse).
If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical
system inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage
or overload the vehicle's electrical system.
230
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
G007446
Fuse box in the engine compartment
The fuse box in the engine compartment has
positions for 36 fuses.
•
Fuses 1–18 are relays/circuit breakers and
should only be removed or replaced by an
authorized Volvo service technician.
•
Fuses 19–36 may be changed at any time
when necessary.
Several extra fuses and a fuse removal tool to
assist in removing/replacing fuses can be
found on the underside of the fuse box cover
in the engine compartment.
``
231
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fuses
G020250
Fuses in the engine compartment
232
1.
Coolant fan (radiator)
50A
9.
Engine functions
30A
17.
Windshield wipers
30A
2.
Power steering
80A
10.
Climate system blower
40A
18.
40A
3.
Feed to passenger compartment fuse box
60A
11.
Headlight washers
20A
Feed to passenger compartment fuse box
12.
Feed to heated rear window
30A
19.
Not in use
4.
Feed to passenger compartment fuse box
60A
13.
Starter motor relay
30A
20.
Horn
80A
Trailer connector (accessory)
40A
Not in use
Element, climate unit
14.
21.
5.
22.
Not in use
6.
Not in use
23.
7.
ABS pump
30A
8.
ABS valves
20A
Engine control module
(ECM)/transmission control
module (TCM)
15.
Not in use
16.
Feed to audio system
30A
15A
10A
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
24.
Not in use
25.
Not in use
26.
Ignition switch
15A
27.
A/C compressor
10A
28.
Not in use
29.
Front fog lights (option)
30.
Not in use
31.
Not in use
32.
Fuel injectors
10A
33.
Heated oxygen sensor, vacuum pump
20A
34.
Ignition coils, climate unit
pressure sensor
10A
35.
Engine sensor valves, A/C
relay, relay coil, PTC element oil trap, canister, mass
air meter
15A
36.
Engine control module
(ECM), throttle sensor
10A
09
15A
``
233
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fuses
G020601
Fuse box in the passenger compartment
The fuse box in the passenger compartment is
located under the glove compartment.
To access the fuses:
1. Remove the upholstery covering the fuse
box by first pressing in the center pins in
the mounting clips approximately 0.5 in
(1 cm) with a small screwdriver and then
pulling the pins out.
2. Turn both retaining screws (2) counterclockwise until they release.
3. Fold down the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it
toward the seat until it stops. Fold it down
completely. The fuse box can be unhooked
completely.
4. Replace the blown fuse.
5. Close the fuse box in reverse order.
234
6. Pull the center pins fully out of the mounting clips, secure the upholstery with the
mounting clips and press the pins into the
mounting clips again. The mounting clips
then expand, holding the upholstery in
position.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
G020246
Fuses in the passenger compartment
44.
Supplemental Restrain System (SRS), engine control
module
10A
49.
Supplemental Restrain System (SRS), Occupant
Weight Sensor (OWS)
Not in use
45.
12-volt socket in rear seat
15A
50.
Not in use
40.
Not in use
46.
51.
AWD, fuel filter relay
10A
Not in use
Lighting – glove compartment, instrument panel, and
footwells
5A
41.
52.
Not in use
Transmission control module (TCM), ABS
5A
42.
47.
Interior lighting
5A
43.
Audio system, Volvo Navigation system (option)
53.
Power steering
10A
48.
Tailgate window wiper/
washer
15A
54.
Park assist (option) BiXenonŸ headlights (option)
10A
55.
Not in use
37.
Not in use
38.
Not in use
39.
15A
10A
``
235
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fuses
Volvo Navigation System
remote control module
(option), alarm siren control
module
10A
57.
On-board diagnostic
socket, brake light switch
15A
58.
Right high beam, auxiliary
lights relay
7.5A
59.
Left high beam
7.5A
60.
Heated driver's seat
(option)
15A
61.
Heated passenger's seat
(option)
15A
62.
Moonroof (option)
20A
63.
Power window and door
lock – rear passenger's side
door
20A
64.
Audio system, Volvo Navigation system (option)
5A
65.
Audio system
66.
Audio system control module (ICM), climate system
67.
Not in use
56.
236
68.
Cruise control
5A
69.
Climate system, rain sensor
(option), BLIS button
(option)
5A
83.
Power window and door
lock – front driver's side
door
25A
84.
Power passenger's seat
25A
70.
Not in use
85.
Power driver's seat
25A
71.
Not in use
86.
5A
72.
Not in use
Interior lighting relay, cargo
area light, power seats
73.
Moonroof, front ceiling
lighting, auto-dim mirror,
(option) seat belt reminder
5A
74.
Fuel pump relay
15A
75.
Not in use
76.
Not in use
77.
Auxiliary equipment control
module (AEM)
78.
Not in use
79.
Back-up lights
5A
80.
Not in use
10A
81.
Power window and door
lock – rear driver's side door
20A
82.
Power window – front passenger's side door
25A
15A
5A
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
237
238
240
244
249
253
254
G020924
Audio functions.....................................................................................
Radio functions.....................................................................................
CD player/CD changer..........................................................................
Audio menu...........................................................................................
BluetoothŸ hands-free connection.......................................................
AUDIO
10
10 Audio
Audio functions
Audio system controls
If the player is being charged through a 12-volt
socket while it is connect to the AUX port,
sound quality may be impaired.
10
The volume of the external sound source AUX
may be different from the volume of the internal
sound sources such as the CD player or the
radio. If the external sound source's volume is
too high, the quality of the sound may be
impaired.
G021296
G026347
This can be prevented by adjusting the external
sound source's input volume.
Auxiliary connector
VOLUME dial
Selecting a sound source
AM/FM – select a radio band
•
Press AM/FM (2) repeatedly to toggle
between FM1, FM2, and AM.
MODE – select a sound source
•
Press MODE (3) repeatedly to toggle
between the CD player and the optional
external sound source AUX or the optional
Sirius satellite radio.
TUNING dial
SOUND button
The currently selected sound source will be
shown in the display.
AUX
The AUX (auxiliary) port, located under the center armrest, can be used to connect for example, an mp3 player.
240
1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower the
audio volume to about one-quarter.
2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio system
by pressing the MODE button.
3. Connect the headphone output from your
music player to the AUX input using a cable
with a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at both
ends.
4. Set your music player's headphone volume to three-quarters using the player's
volume controls.
5. Press MENU on the audio system, and
navigate to AUX Volume or AUX Input
Volume.
6. Turn the volume knob to raise or lower the
AUX Input Volume until you hear music at
a comfortable level.
10 Audio
Audio functions
7. If there is distortion, lower your music player's headphone volume until the distortion
goes away.
8. Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio
volume to a comfortable level.
Volume
Use the volume dial (1) or the buttons in the
steering wheel keypad to adjust the volume
level. The volume level is also adjusted automatically according to the vehicle's speed, see
page 243 for more information on this function.
Steering wheel keypad
The four buttons on the steering wheel keypad
can be used to control the audio system. The
steering wheel keypad can be used to adjust
volume, shift between preset stations and
change CD tracks. Press one of the two lefthand buttons briefly to change to the next/
previous preset radio station, or to go to the
next/previous track on a CD. Press and hold
down these buttons to search within a track on
a CD.
An auxiliary device, such as an iPod, MP3
player or a USB flash drive can be connected
to the audio system via the connector in the
center console storage compartment. A standard cable from an iPod or MP3 player can be
routed under the cover to the AUX connector
in the storage compartment.
10
A sound source must be chosen, depending on
the device that has been connected:
1. Use MODE to select iPod or USB. The text
CONNECT DEVICE will be displayed.
Daytime/twilight display
In daylight the information is displayed against
a light background. In darkness it is displayed
against a dark background.
2. Connect the device to the connector in the
center console storage compartment (see
the illustration).
The text LOADING will be displayed while the
system loads the files (folder structure) on the
device. This may take a short time.
USB/iPod connector (option)
Steering wheel keypad
G019823
G026424
When information about the files (the folder
structure) on the device has been loaded, the
resulting list includes information on the artist,
genre and song title.
To navigate in the folder structure, press
ENTER and scroll up and down the folders
using the arrow buttons (on the audio system
control panel or on the steering wheel keypad).
Press the right arrow button to select a folder.
Press the left arrow button to go up a level in
the folder structure. Press ENTER to go down
a level in the folder structure.
``
241
10 Audio
Audio functions
Tracks can be selected in two ways:
10
•
Turn the Tuning knob (no. 4 in the illustration on page 244) clockwise or counterclockwise
•
Use the right or left arrow keys on the navigation control (no. 5 in the illustration on
page 244) to select the desired track. The
arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad
can also be used in the same way.
NOTE
The system supports playback of files in the
most common versions of formats such as
mp3, wma, and wav. However, there may be
versions of these formats that the system
does not support.
iPod
An iPod receives current and its battery is
charged through the connecting cord. However, if the iPod's battery is completely
drained, it should be recharged before the iPod
is connected to the audio system.
NOTE
When an iPOD is used as a sound source,
the vehicle's audio system has a menu
structure similar to the one in the iPOD. See
the iPOD's manual for detailed information.
To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is
advisable to only store music files on the drive.
It will take considerably longer for the system
to index the files on the drive if it contains anything other than compatible music files.
MP3 player
Many mp3 players have a file indexing system
that is not supported by the vehicle's audio
system. In order to use an mp3 player, the system must be set to USB Removable device/
Mass Storage Device.
242
1. Press SOUND (5). Press this button
repeatedly until you come to the setting
that you wish to change.
2. Turn the TUNING dial (4) to make the
desired setting.
The following settings can be made:
BASS–set the bass level
TREBLE–set the treble level
BALANCE–set the left/right sound balance
For further information, refer to the accessory
manual USB/iPod Music Interface.
Sound settings
USB flash drive
intended to enable the user to adapt sound
reproduction to his/her personal preferences.
Optimal sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimal
sound reproduction through the use of digital
signal processing. This calibration takes into
account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the seating position of the listener, etc., for
each combination of vehicle and audio system.
There is also dynamic calibration that takes
into account the setting of the volume control,
radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. The
sound settings described in this manual, such
as BASS, TREBLE, and EQUALIZER are only
FADER–set the front/rear sound balance
SUBWOOFER (accessory)–set the level for
the subwoofer (bass speaker)
CENTER–make settings for the center speaker
SURROUND–make settings for surround
sound
Subwoofer (accessory)
To switch the subwoofer on or off:
1. Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS and press
ENTER.
3. Select SUBWOOFER and press ENTER.
10 Audio
Audio functions
G021216
Surround sound
Surround sound settings are used to
balance sound levels throughout the
vehicle. Surround settings for the various sound sources are made sepa-
rately.
NOTE
•
•
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only
available on the Premium Sound system.
When listening to FM radio stations,
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions
best in areas with strong reception. If
reception is weak, selecting 2 or 3channel stereo may provide better
sound quality.
The Dolby symbol will be appear in the display
when Dolby Pro Logic II is activated.
There are three alternative settings:
•
•
•
Pro Logic II
3-channel
Off (normal 2-channel stereo)
Activating/deactivating Surround sound
1. Press MENU followed by ENTER.
1
quencies can be selected with the Right/
Left arrows.
2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
3. Select Surround FM/AM/CD/AUX and
press ENTER.
•
4. Select Pro logic II, 3-channel stereo or
Off and press ENTER.
Automatic sound control
Equalizer Front/Rear
This function is used to fine-tune the sound
level for different frequencies separately.
NOTE
This function is only available on certain
sound systems.
Save the settings by pressing ENTER or
exit without saving by pressing EXIT.
10
The audio system's volume is adjusted automatically according to the speed of the vehicle.
There are three settings available, which determine the level of volume compensation:
• Low
• Medium1
• High
To set the automatic sound level:
1. Press MENU followed by ENTER.
To adjust the equalizer settings:
1. Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
3. Select AUTO. VOLUME CONTROL in the
menu and press ENTER.
3. Select Equalizer Front/Rear and press
ENTER.
4. Select Low, Medium, or High and press
ENTER.
The column in the display indicates the sound
level for the current frequency.
•
Adjust the level with the TUNING dial (4),
or use the Up/Down arrows. Additional fre-
Default setting.
243
10 Audio
Radio functions
Radio function controls
10
Searching for stations
Automatically storing a station
There are two ways to manually tune a radio
station:
Pressing AUTO (7) automatically searches for
and stores up to ten strong AM or FM stations
in a separate memory. If more than ten stations
are found, the ten strongest ones are stored.
This function is especially useful in areas in
which you are not familiar with radio stations or
their frequencies.
1. Turn the TUNING dial (3) to the desired frequency.
G026366
2. Press the left or right arrow key on the
MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL and
hold it down. The radio scans slowly in the
selected direction and will increase the
scanning speed after a few seconds.
Release the button when the desired frequency appears in the display.
The frequency can be fine-tuned by short
presses on the left/right arrow keys.
1. AM/FM1/FM2 selection
2. Station preset buttons
3. TUNING dial for selecting radio stations
Manually storing a station
4. SCAN
1. Tune to the desired station.
5. MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press
the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a
menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of
the control to search for or change radio
stations/CD tracks
2. Press and hold the preset button under
which the station is to be stored. The audio
system sound will be interrupted for a few
seconds and STATION STORED will
appear in the display.
6. EXIT–press to cancel a menu selection or
a selected function
7. AUTO–search for and store the strongest
radio stations in the area in which you are
driving
244
Storing preset stations
NOTE
A total of 30 stations can be stored; 10 stations each in AM, FM1 and FM2.
To use the AUTO function:
1. Select a waveband using the AM/FM button (1).
2. Start the search by pressing AUTO until
AUTO STORING appears in the display.
When the search is completed, AUTO
STORING will no longer be displayed. If there
are no stations with sufficient signal strength,
NO AST FOUND is displayed.
The auto-stored stations can be selected using
the preset buttons (2).
Press EXIT (6) to terminate the automatic storing function.
When the radio is in auto-store mode, AUTO is
shown in the display. AUTO disappears when
you return to normal radio mode, which can be
done by briefly pressing AM/FM (1), EXIT (6),
or AUTO (7).
10 Audio
Radio functions
To return to the Auto-store mode, press the
AUTO button briefly and select a stored station
by pressing one of the preset buttons (2).
Saving auto-stored stations in the preset
memory
An auto-stored station can be saved in the
memory for manually preset stations.
1. Press AUTO (7) briefly.
> Auto is displayed.
2. Press one of the preset buttons (2) under
which the station is to be stored. Hold
down the button until STATION
STORED is displayed.
The radio will then exit auto-store mode and
the stored station can be selected by pressing
the preset button.
Scanning
SCAN (4) automatically searches through the
selected waveband for strong AM or FM stations. When the radio finds a station, that station will be played for approximately 8 seconds, after which scanning resumes.
Activating/deactivating SCAN
1. Select radio mode using the AM/FM button (2).
2. Press SCAN to activate the function.
SCAN is shown in the display.
3. Press the SCAN or EXIT button to deactivate the scan function and listen to the
selected station.
Listening to satellite radio
The Sirius satellite system consists of a number
of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous
orbit.
10
NOTE
Storing a station found with SCAN
A station can be stored as a preset while the
SCAN function is activated.
•
Press one of the preset buttons (2) under
which the station is to be stored. Hold
down the button until STATION
STORED is displayed.
The SCAN function will be deactivated and the
station can be selected by pressing the preset
button.
•
The digital signals from the Sirius satellites are line-of-sight, which means that
physical obstructions such as bridges,
tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere
with signal reception.
•
Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects transported on roof racks or
in a ski box, or other antennas that may
impede signals from the SIRIUS satellites.
Radio text
Selecting Sirius radio mode
Certain stations broadcast program information, which can be shown in the display.
1. Press Power to switch on the audio system
(see page 244 for information on the standard radio functions).
To start this function:
1. Select FM1 or FM2 and press the MENU
button.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Select RADIOTEXT in the menu and press
ENTER.
To deactivate this function, select
RADIOTEXT again and press ENTER.
2. Press the MODE button repeatedly until
Sirius 1 or 2 is displayed.
Activating Sirius radio
1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no
audio, which means that the channel is
unsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed
``
245
10 Audio
Radio functions
(see also "Selecting a channel" in the right
column).
10
2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).
5. Use the left or right arrow keys to select a
channel in the currently chosen category.
1. Press MENU and scroll to "Direct channel
entry."
6. Press ENTER to listen to a channel.
2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the
channel's number.
3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press
AUTO to display this number. It is also
possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the
MENU.
NOTE
4. "UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION" will be
displayed while the subscription is being
updated, after which the display will return
to the normal view.
SIRUS ID
The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the
Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your
account and when making any account transactions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred
to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN).
Selecting a channel category
1. Select Sirius radio mode as described
above.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll
through the list of categories.
4. Press ENTER or the right arrow key to
select a category.
246
•
The category "All" is default, which enables you to scroll through the entire list
of available satellite channels.
•
The channel categories are automatically updated several times a year. This
takes approximately two minutes and
will interrupt normal broadcasting. A
message will be displayed while updating is in progress. Information on channel or feature updates is available at
www.sirius.com.
Selecting a channel
3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this
channel, even if it belongs to a category
other than the currently selected one.
NOTE
•
The numbers of skipped or locked
channels will not be displayed.
•
If a channel is locked, the access code
must be entered before the channel can
be selected. See "Unlocking a channel"
on page 247.
Scanning
There are three ways of tuning in a channel:
•
•
•
NOTE
Using the left and right arrow keys
SCAN automatically searches through the
list of satellite channels. see page 245 for
more detailed information.
By turning the tuning control
Through direct channel entry
Direct channel entry
The Sirius satellite channels are numbered
consecutively throughout all of the categories.
To access a channel directly:
Storing a channel
•
A long press on one of the number keys
stores the currently tuned channel on that
key.
•
A short press on a number key while the
radio is in Sirius 1or 2 mode will tune to the
10 Audio
Radio functions
preset satellite channel stored on that button, regardless of the currently selected
channel category.
Song Seek and Song Memory
The Song Seek and Song Memory functions
provide both audio and visual notification when
Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs.
Song Seek enables you to store the name of
the song for future advance notification when
that song is being played. The Song Memory
feature makes it possible to view all of the current songs that are stored in memory.
Song seek
Advanced settings
When a satellite radio channel plays one of the
songs stored in the song memory, the listener
will be alerted by a text message and an audible signal.
This menu function enables you to make settings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions.
To access this menu:
•
Press ENTER to listen to the song or
EXIT to cancel.
To activate/deactivate the song seek function:
Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's
memory.
1. Press MENU.
3. Select Advanced Sirius settings.
WARNING
Settings should be made when the vehicle
is at a standstill.
3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the
function.
NOTE
When the song has ended, the radio will
remain tuned to the channel on which the
song was played.
Radio text
If a new song is selected when the memory is
full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to
delete the last song on the list.
The text that is displayed about the song that
is currently playing can be changed. Use the
AUTO button or the menu to display the Artist,
Title, Composer, or switch radio text off.
The remaining songs in the list will move
down one position, and the newly added
song will be placed at the top of the list.
2. Scroll to Sirius menu.
2. Scroll to "Song seek"
2. Scroll to "Add song to song mem." and
follow the instructions shown in the display.
NOTE
1. Press MENU.
1. Press MENU
Song memory
10
The following settings can be made in the Sirius menu.
•
•
•
•
Songs can be added to the song list
•
Your Sirius ID can be displayed
Channel skip settings can be made
Channel lock settings can be made
The channel access code can be displayed
or changed
Skip options
This function is used to remove a channel from
the list of available channels.
Skip current
1. Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and press
ENTER.
``
247
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
2. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
2. Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and press
ENTER
3. Skip channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER or right arrow key.
3. Enter the channel access code and press
ENTER.
Unskip all channels
4. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
This permanently removes all channels from
the skip list and makes them available for
selection.
Temp. unskip all ch.
This function will temporarily unskip all channels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the skip list and will again
be skipped the next time the ignition is
switched on.
Channel lock
Access to specific channels can be restricted
(locked). A locked channel will not provide
audio, song titles, or artist information.
NOTE
All channels are initially unlocked.
Locking a channel
1. Select "Sirius ID" in the menu and select
LOCK OPTIONS and press ENTER.
248
5. Lock channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER or right arrow.
The channel is now locked and a checked box
will be displayed to indicate this. It will be necessary to enter the channel access code1 in
order to listen to a locked channel.
Unlocking a channel:
A channel's access code1 is required to unlock
a channel.
CHANGE CODE
This function makes it possible to change the
channel access code. The default code is
0000.
To change the code:
1. Select CHANGE CODE and press
ENTER.
2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.
3. Enter the code and press ENTER.
4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.
If an incorrect code is entered, the text
WRONG CODE! is displayed.
If you have forgotten the access code:
Unlock all channels
1. Select "SIRIUS ID" in the Sirius settings
menu and press ENTER.
This permanently removes all channels from
the locked list and makes them available for
selection.
2. Press and hold the ENTER button for
2 seconds.
Temp. unlock all ch.
3. The current code will be displayed.
This function will temporarily unlock all channels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the locked list and will
again be locked the next time the ignition is
switched on.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with
assistance.
SIRUS ID
This function displays the 12-digit Sirius activation ID.
10 Audio
CD player/CD changer
Playing a CD
CD function controls
NOTE
Single CD player
•
Start the CD player by pressing the MODE button (5) and inserting a disc in the slot (4). If there
is already a disc inserted, it will begin to play.
Ensure that INSERT DISC is displayed
before inserting a disc.
•
If a CD position in the changer containing a disc is selected, and the audio
system is in CD mode when it is
switched on, the CD will play automatically.
NOTE
If a CD is in the slot when the audio system
is in CD mode, the CD will be played automatically.
10
CD eject
G026367
Eject from Single CD player
MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press
the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a
menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of
the control to change CD tracks/fast forward/back
Buttons for selecting a disc in the
optional CD changer
CD changer
Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc.
The CD changer can hold up to six discs.
Eject from CD changer
1. Start the CD changer by pressing the
MODE button (5).
This function makes it possible to eject a single
disc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer.
2. Select an empty position using the 1 – 6
buttons or the up/down keys on the MENU
NAVIGATION CONTROL. The display
shows which positions are empty.
•
Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject the
disc that is currently playing.
•
A longer press (more than two seconds)
starts the process of ejecting all of the
discs in the changer.
3. Insert a disc into the slot (4).
CD eject button
CD slot
MODE button
TUNING dial for selecting tracks
``
249
10 Audio
CD player/CD changer
NOTE
10
•
•
The EJECT ALL function can only be
used while the vehicle is at a standstill
and will be cancelled if the vehicle
begins to move.
For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected
CD must be removed within 12 seconds
or it will be automatically drawn back
into the slot and the CD player will enter
pause mode. Press the CD button to
restart the disc.
CD Pause
When the audio system volume is turned off
completely, the CD player will pause and will
resume playing when the volume is turned up
again.
Audio files
In addition to playing normal music CDs, the
CD player/changer can also play discs containing files in mp3 or wma format.
NOTE
Certain discs that are copy protected cannot be read by the player.
When a disc with audio files is inserted in the
player, the player scans the disc's folders
before it begins playing the files. The length of
250
time that this takes depends on the quality of
the disc.
Navigating the disc and playing tracks
If a disc with audio files is in the CD player,
press ENTER to display a list of folders on the
disc.
Use the up and down arrows in the navigation
control (see the illustration on page 249) to
move among the folders on the disc. Audio files
have the
symbol and folders containing
these files have the
symbol. Press
ENTER to play a selected folder or a file.
When the music file has been played, the
player will continue to play the rest of the files
in the current folder. When all of the files in the
folder have been played, the player will automatically go to the next folder and play the files
in it.
Press the left or right arrow key on the navigation control if the entire name of the current
track does not fit in the display.
Changing tracks
Briefly press the left or right arrow keys on the
MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL to skip to the
previous or next track/file.
NOTE
The TUNING dial (6) (turn clockwise to go to
the next track/file, or counterclockwise to
go to the previous track/file) or the steering
wheel keypad can also be used for this purpose.
Fast forward/back
Press and hold down the left or right arrows
keys in the MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL (or
the corresponding keys on the optional steering wheel keypad) to search within a track/file
or the whole disc. The search continues for as
long as the buttons are held down.
Random play
This function plays the tracks/files on a CD (or
on all of the CDs if the vehicle is equipped with
the optional CD changer) in random order
(shuffle).
Activating/deactivating the random
function-CD player
If a normal CD is being played:
1. Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2. Select Random and press ENTER.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2. Select Random and press ENTER.
10 Audio
CD player/CD changer
3. Select Disc or Folder and press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating the random
function-CD changer
If a normal CD is being played:
1. Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2. Select Random and press ENTER.
3. Select Single disc or All discs and press
ENTER.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2. Select Random and press ENTER.
3. Select Single disc or Folder and press
ENTER.
NOTE
1. Press MENU. Select the menu for relevant
sound source and press ENTER.
2. Select Disc text in the menu and press
ENTER.
> If information is stored on the disc, it will
now appear in the display.
To deactivate this function, select Disc text in
the menu and press ENTER.
Scan
This function plays the first 10 seconds of each
track/file on the CD.
•
•
Press the EXIT button to stop random play.
The random function is automatically deactivated when another disc is selected.
Disc text (CD changer only)
Certain CDs contain information about the
disc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. This
information can be shown in the display by
activating the DISC TEXT function.
•
The Eject all function can only be used
while the vehicle is at a standstill and will
be cancelled if the vehicle begins to
move.
•
For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected
CD must be removed within 12 seconds
or it will be automatically drawn back
into the slot and the CD player will enter
pause mode. Press the CD button to
restart the disc.
Press SCAN.
Compact disc care
Press EXIT or SCAN to stop the scan function and listen to an entire track/file.
Keep the following in mind when playing/handling compact discs
CD eject
Single CD player
CD changer only–you can only select the
next random track/file on the current disc.
NOTE
Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc.
•
Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself.
They could become stuck in the player.
•
CDR discs can cause listening problems
due to the quality of the disc or recording
equipment used.
•
DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc
(combined CD/DVD) does not meet CD
specifications and may not play in your
audio system.
•
Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with a
soft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from the
center outward. If necessary, dampen the
cloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thoroughly before using.
CD changer
This function makes it possible to eject a single
disc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer.
•
Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject the
disc that is currently playing.
•
A longer press (more than two seconds)
starts the process of ejecting all of the
discs in the changer.
10
``
251
10 Audio
CD player/CD changer
•
Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liquid. Use only cleaners specifically made for
CDs.
•
Use discs of the correct size only (3.5"
discs should never be used).
•
Volvo does not recommend the use of
plastic outer rings on the disc.
•
Condensation may occur on discs/optical
components of the changer in cold winter
weather. The disc can be dried with a
clean, lint-free cloth. Optical components
in the CD changer may, however, take up
to one hour to dry off.
•
•
Never attempt to play a damaged CD.
10
252
When not in use, the discs should be
stored in their covers. Avoid storing discs
in excessive heat, direct sunlight or in
dusty locations.
10 Audio
Audio menu
FM1/FM2 menu
1. RADIOTEXT ON/OFF
10
2. ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS
3. AUDIO SETTINGS
AM menu
1. AUDIO SETTINGS
CD menu
1. RANDOM
2. AUDIO SETTINGS
CD changer menu
1. RANDOM
2. DISC TEXT ON/OFF
3. AUDIO SETTINGS
AUX menu
1. AUX VOLUME
2. SOUND SETTINGS
253
10 Audio
BluetoothŸ hands-free connection
Introduction
and other controls on the cell phone can
always be used regardless of whether or not
the phone is connected to the hands-free system.
10
NOTE
Not all cell phones are fully compatible with
the hands-free system. A list of compatible
phones is available at your Volvo retailer or
at www.volvocars.com
G029503
WARNING
System overview
Never use the hands-free feature or any
other device in your vehicle in a way that
distracts you from the task of driving safely.
Distraction can lead to a serious accident.
Cell phone
Location of the microphone
Getting started
Center console control panel and display
Use the controls in the center console (3) to
access, navigate and make selections in the
hands-free system’s menus (see page 258).
BluetoothŸ hands-free
This option makes it possible to set up a wireless connection between a Bluetooth-enabled
cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system. This
enables the audio system to function as a
hands-free connection and allows you to
remote-control a number of the phone’s functions. The microphone used by this system is
located in the ceiling console (2). The buttons
254
Activating/deactivating
A short press on the PHONE button in the center console activates the hands-free system.
The text TELEPHONE will appear at the top of
the display to indicate that the audio system is
in telephone mode.
symbol indicates that the hands-free
The
system is active.
A long press on the PHONE button deactivates
the hands-free system and disconnects the
cell phone.
Connecting cell phones
The procedure for connecting a cell phone varies, depending on the phone itself, and on
whether or not the phone has been previously
connected.
If this is the first time the phone is to be connected to the hands-free system, proceed as
follows:
Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus
1. Activate the cell phone’s BluetoothŸ function (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual if
necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com
2. Activate the vehicle’s BluetoothŸ handsfree system by briefly pressing the
PHONE button.
> Add phone will be displayed. If one or
more cell phones are already registered
in the system, they will also be displayed.
3. Select Add phone.
10 Audio
Bluetooth
> The audio system will search for cell
phones that are in range. This search
takes approximately 30 seconds. Any
phones detected will be displayed with
their BluetoothŸ names. The hands-free
system’s BluetoothŸ name will appear
in the cell phone’s display as My Car.
4. Select one of the cell phones shown in the
audio system’s (center console) display.
5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the
digits shown in the audio system’s display.
Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus
1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly
pressing the PHONE button in the center
console. If there is a cell phone connected,
disconnect it from the hands-free system
(by pressing PHONE in the center console
for several seconds).
2. Perform a search using the cell phone’s
BluetoothŸ function (consult the cell
phone’s owner’s manual if necessary).
3. Select My Car in the list of devices shown
in the cell phone’s display.
4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234
in the cell phone.
5. Connect to My Car from the cell phone.
The cell phone will be registered and will be
connected automatically to the audio system
while the text Synchronising is displayed. For
more information on synchronizing a cell
phone, see page 257.
When a connection has been established, the
symbol and the cell phone’s BluetoothŸ
name will be displayed. The cell phone can
now be controlled from the audio system.
Making a call
1. Ensure that TELEPHONE is shown at the
top of the center console display and that
the
symbol is visible (by pressing briefly
on PHONE on the center console).
2. Dial the desired phone number or use the
phone book (see page 257).
3. Press ENTER.
End the call by pressing EXIT.
Disconnecting the cell phone
The cell phone is automatically disconnected
from the audio system if it is moved out of
range. For more information about connections, see page 254.
hands-free connection
the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive).
When the cell phone is disconnected from the
hands-free system, a call in progress can be
continued using the cell phone’s own speaker
and microphone.
10
NOTE
Certain cell phones may require confirmation from the phone’s keypad when a call is
transferred from hands-free to the cell
phone.
Handling calls
Incoming calls
Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the audio
system is currently in e.g., CD or FM mode.
Press EXIT to defer a call.
Automatic answer
This function means that incoming calls will be
answered automatically. Activate or deactivate
the function in the menu system under Phone
settings Call options Automatic
answer.
The cell phone can be manually disconnected
from the hands-free system by pressing
PHONE. The hands-free system is also deactivated when the ignition is switched off (or if
``
255
10 Audio
BluetoothŸ hands-free connection
10
Call settings
Sound settings
While a call is in progress, press MENU or
ENTER on the center console to access the
following functions:
Call volume
• Microphone off–mute the audio system’s
microphone.
• Transfer call to mobile–transfer the call
from hands-free to the cell phone.
• Phone book–this feature enables you to
search for a stored telephone number.
NOTE
•
•
On certain cell phones, the connection
is broken when the mute function is
used, which is normal. If this happens,
the hands-free system will prompt you
to reconnect.
A new call cannot be initiated while
another call is in progress.
Call volume can be adjusted when the handsfree system is activated. Use the buttons in the
steering wheel keypad or the audio system’s
volume control.
NOTE
The connected cell phone’s ring tone is not
switched off when one of the hands-free
system's ringing tones is used.
If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s
ring tone1, go to Phone settings Sounds
and volume Ring signal Use mobile
phone signal
Audio system sound can be automatically
muted when a phone call is received in Phone
settings Sounds and volume Mute
/
radio and adjust the volume with the
keys on the center console.
More information about registering
and connecting cell phones
Ringing tones
The hands-free system’s integrated ringing
tones can be selected in Phone settings
256
Ring
While a phone call is in progress, volume for
the audio system can be adjusted in the normal
way with the audio system's volume control. In
order to adjust volume during a phone call, the
audio system must be switched to one of the
other modes (FM, CD, etc).
Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring volume and adjust the volume with
/
keys on the center console.
the
Not supported by all cell phones
Ring signal
Audio system volume
Ringing volume
1
Sounds and volume
signal 1,2,3....
A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registered
in the hands-free system. Registration only
needs to be done once for each phone. After
registration, the cell phone no longer needs to
be in sight or searchable. Only one cell phone
can be connected to hands-free at a time.
Phones can be unregistered in Bluetooth
Remove telephone
Automatic connection
When the hands-free system is active and the
most recently connected cell phone is within
range, it is detected automatically. When the
10 Audio
Bluetooth
audio system searches for the most recently
connected phone, this phone’s name appears
in the display. To manually connect a different
cell phone, press EXIT.
Manual connection
To connect a phone other than the one that
was most recently connected or to switch
between cell phones that are already registered in the hands-free system:
1. Put the audio system in telephone mode.
2. Press PHONE in the center console and
select one of the phones on the list.
A connection can also be established in the
menu system under Bluetooth Connect
phone or Change phone.
Phone book
In order to use the hands-free system’s phone
book (list of contacts), TELEPHONE must be
displayed at the top of the center console dissymbol must be visible.
play and the
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book of each registered cell phone. The phone
book is automatically copied each time a
phone is connected. This function can be activated in Phone settings Synchronise
phone book. Searches for contacts are only
made in the phone book of the currently connected cell phone.
NOTE
If a particular cell phone does not support
copying of the phone book, List is empty
will be displayed when copying has been
completed.
If the phone book contains information about
someone who is trying to call you, this information will be shown in the display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search for a contact in the
phone book is to press and hold any of the
buttons 2–9. This starts a search based on the
first letter on the button that has been pressed.
The phone book can also be accessed by
pressing the navigation buttons
/
on the
center console or by pressing
/
on the
steering wheel keypad. A search can also be
made in the phone book’s search menu in
Phone book Search:
1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s name
and press ENTER or simply press ENTER.
2. Select the desired contact and press
ENTER to make a call to that person.
hands-free connection
Voice control
If the cell phone that is currently connected
allows calls to be made via voice commands,
this function can be used by pressing and holding ENTER.
10
Voice mail number
The phone number to your voice mail can be
changed in the menu Phone settings Call
options Voice mail number. If no number
has been stored, this menu can be accessed
by a prolonged press on button 1. Once a
phone number has been stored, press and hold
1 to dial this number.
Call lists
Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are copied to the hands-free system each time that
phone is connected. These lists are then updated while the phone is connected. Press
ENTER to show the most recently dialed numbers. Other call lists can be found under Call
register.
NOTE
Certain cell phones display the list of the
most recently dialed numbers in reverse
order.
``
257
10 Audio
BluetoothŸ hands-free connection
Entering text
10
Button
Text is entered by using the number buttons in
the center console. Press a button once to
enter the first letter on the button, twice to enter
the second letter, etc. Continue to press the
button to display other characters.
TUV8ÜÙ
Press briefly if two characters are
to be entered in succession from
the same button.
+0@*#&$£/%
Shift between uppercase and
lowercase letters
Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( )
DEF3ÈÉ
GHI4Ì
BluetoothŸ menus
1.
Missed calls
2.
Received calls
3
Dialed calls
4.
Phone book
JKL5
MNO6ÑÖÒØ
PQRS7ß
258
5.
4.1.
Search
4.2.
Copy fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth...
5.1.
Change phone
5.2.
Connect phone
5.3.
Disconnect phone
Connect fr. mobile phone
Phone settings
WXYZ9
Function
ABC2ÄÅÀÆÇ
6.
6.1.
Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press
and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that
have been entered. Use the
/
buttons on
the center console to navigate among the characters.
Button
5.4.
Function
Call options
6.1.2.
Automatic answer
6.1.3.
Voice mail number
6.2.
Sounds and volume
6.3.
IDIS
6.4.
Synchronize phone book
10 Audio
10
259
260
262
264
267
269
270
272
274
275
G000000
Label information..................................................................................
Dimensions and weights.......................................................................
Fuel, oils, and fluids..............................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Engine specifications............................................................................
Electrical system...................................................................................
Three-way catalytic converter...............................................................
Volvo programs.....................................................................................
SPECIFICATIONS
11
11 Specifications
Label information
G032545
G026511
11
262
11 Specifications
Label information
Model plate
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Codes for
color and upholstery, etc.
tification label on the underside of the hood.
For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA)
and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS)
standards (Canada)
11
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable
safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the facing side of the driver's
door. For further information regarding these
regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer.
Loads and Tire Pressures
The appearance of the decal will vary, depending on the market for which the vehicle is
intended.
Canadian models have the upper decal
U.S. models have the lower decal.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)1
The VIN plate is located on the top left surface
of the dashboard. The VIN is also stamped on
the right hand door pillar.
Vehicle Emission Control Information
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable
emission standards, as evidenced by the cer1
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts.
263
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions
G017205
11
264
Position
Dimension
in. (mm)
A
Wheelbase
103.9 in. (264 cm)
B
Length
177.7 in. (451 cm)
C
Load length, floor, seatback down
69.7 in. (177 cm)
D
Load length, floor
39 in. (99 cm)
E
Height
57.2 in. (145 cm)
F
Track, front
60.4 in. (154 cm)
G
Track, rear
60.3 in. (153 cm)
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Position
Dimension
in. (mm)
H
Width
69.7 in. (177 cm)
I
Width encl. door mirrors
79.6 in. (202 cm)
11
Weights
Category
USA
Gross vehicle weight
FWDA:
Capacity weight
Permissible axle weight, front
Permissible axle weight, rear
Curb weight
Max. roof load
Canada
4320 lbs
1960 kg
FWD Turbo: 4320 lbs
1960 kg
AWDB
2020 kg
Turbo: 4450 lbs
FWD: 800 lbs
365 kg
AWD: 800 lbs
365 kg
FWD: 2380 lbs
1080 kg
FWD Turbo: 2380 lbs
1080 kg
AWD Turbo: 2420 lbs
1100 kg
FWD: 2220 lbs
1010 kg
FWD Turbo: 2220 lbs
1010 kg
AWD Turbo AWD: 2220 lbs
1010 kg
FWD: 3265–3345 lbs
1450–1515 kg
AWD: 3470–3500 lbs
1565–1590 kg
All models: 165 lbs
All models: 75 kg
``
265
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
A
B
C
Category
USA
Canada
Max. trailer weight (w/o brakes)C
All models: 1540 lbs
All models: 700 kg
Max. trailer weight (with brakes)
All models: 2000 lbs
All models: 900 kg
Max. tongue weight
All models: 165 lbs
All models: 75 kg
FWD = Front Wheel Drive
AWD = All Wheel Drive
Models equipped with the B5244S7 engine (engine code 39, which is the 6th and 7th digits from the left in your vehicle's VIN number, see chapter Label information, for the location of the VIN plate),
may not be used to tow trailers or vehicles of any kind. This could cause damage to the vehicle's emission control systems.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible axle loads and/
or the gross vehicle weight must not be
exceeded.
WARNING
When adding accessories, equipment, luggage and other cargo to your vehicle, the
total capacity weight must not be exceeded.
266
11 Specifications
Fuel, oils, and fluids
Specifications and capacities
Category
Specification
Capacity
Fuel tank
Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum
octane requirement AKI 87, recommended rating AKI 91 or above.
15.9 US gallons (60 liters)
Models with All Wheel Drive have a tank volume
of 15 US gallons (57 liters).
11
Models with engine code 39 have a fuel tank
capacity of 14 US gallons (53 liters). This code
is the 6th and 7th digits from the left in your
vehicle's VIN number. see page 262 for the
location of the VIN plate.
Engine oil (with filter replacement)
See page 269 for information on engine oil
specifications.
6.1 US quarts (5.8 liters)
Automatic transmission oil
Non-turbo engine: JWS 3309
8.19 US quarts (7.75 liters)
Manual transmission oil
BOT 130
5-speed: 2.2 US quarts (2.1 liters)
6-speed: 2.1 US quarts (2.0 liters) – turbo models
Coolant
Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (50/50 mixture
of water and anti-freeze)
10.5 US quarts (10 liters) – models with automatic transmission
10 US quarts (9.5 liters) – models with manual
transmission
Brake fluid
DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N
9437433
0.63 US quarts (0.6 liters)
Power steering fluid
WSS M2C204-A or equivalent
1.3 US quarts (1.2 liters) – system and reservoir
combined
``
267
11 Specifications
Fuel, oils, and fluids
Category
Specification
Capacity
Washer fluid reservoir
Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather conditions.
6.8 US quarts (6.5 liters)
Air conditioning system
Refrigerant – R134a
1.2 lbs. (530 grams)
11
NOTE
The transmission oil does not normally need
to be changed during the service life of the
vehicle. However, it may be necessary to
replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven
in areas of sustained temperature extremes
(hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long
distances, for prolonged driving in mountainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven
short distances in temperatures under 40 °F
(5 °C).
268
11 Specifications
Engine oil
Oil specifications
Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC
specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.
Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel
economy, engine performance, or engine protection.
Oil viscosity (stable ambient
temperatures)
recommended for driving in areas of sustained
temperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, and for prolonged driving in mountainous areas.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
symbol
11
Volume: 6.1 US qts (5.8 liters).
Volume between the MIN and Max marks on
the dipstick: approximately 1.4 US qts (1.3 liters).
Oil additives must not be used.
NOTE
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
changed at the normal service intervals.
This oil is only used at customer request, at
additional charge. Please consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Operation in hot climates
When temperatures exceed 104° F (40° C) in
your area, Volvo recommends, for the protection of your engine, that you use a heavier
weight oil, such as such as SAE 5W-40 or
0W-40. See the viscosity chart.
The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into
three parts:
Operation in temperate climates
•
Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life.
Under normal use when temperatures do not
exceed 104° F (40° C), SAE 5W-30 will provide
good fuel economy and engine protection. See
the viscosity chart.
The upper section describes the oil's performance level.
•
•
The center identifies the oil's viscosity.
Extreme engine operation
G022917
Depending on your driving habits, premium or
synthetic oils may provide superior fuel economy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo
retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician for recommendations on premium
or synthetic oils.
G023491
Volvo recommends Castrol.
The lower section indicates whether the oil
has demonstrated energy-conserving
properties in a standard test in comparison
to a reference oil.
Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40
and complying with oil quality requirements are
269
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
B5244S4
B5244S7A
B5254T7
kW/rps
125/100
123/100
169/83
hp/rpm
168/6000
165/6000
227/5000
Nm/rps
230/73
230/73
320/25-80
ft. lbs./rpm
170/4400
170/4400
236/1500-4800
No. of cylinders
5
5
5
Displacement (liters/cubic inches)
2.44/148.6
2.44/148.6
2.52/153.8
Bore (mm/in.)
83/3.27
83/3.27
83/3.27
Stroke (mm/in.)
90/3.54
90/3.54
93.2/3.67
Compression ratio
10.3:1
10.3:1
9.0:1
type
Volvo kit no. 30650843
Volvo kit no. 30650843
Volvo kit no. 30650379
gap inches/mm
(3x) 0.024 ± 0.004 in./0.6
± 0.1mm
(3x) 0.024 ± 0.004 in./0.6
± 0.1mm
0.027in./0.7mm
tightening torque ft. lbs./Nm
22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm
22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm
22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm
Engine designation
OutputB
11
Torque
Spark plugs
A
B
270
Certain markets
The engine specifications for horsepower and torque listed in this table are based on the use of premium fuel.
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
Charge air cooler (Intercooler)
Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-compressor to force air into the engine inlet manifold and a charge air cooler to cool the
compressed inlet air. The resulting increase in
air flow raises pressure in the intake manifold
and increases engine power over that developed by the normally-aspirated engine. The
charge air cooler (which resembles a radiator)
is located between the turbo-compressor and
inlet manifold.
11
Fuel system
The engine is equipped with a multiport fuel
injection system.
271
11 Specifications
Electrical system
General information
12-volt system with voltage controlled generator. Single wire system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors,
grounded on the chassis.
If the battery must be replaced, replace it with
one with the same cold start capacity and
reserve capacity as the original (see the decal
on the battery).
WARNING
11
Battery
A
B
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Voltage
12 V
12 V
Cold start
capacity
(CCA)
600 AA
700 AB
Reserve
capacity
(RC)
120 min
135 min
Capacity
(Ah)
70
80
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Models equipped with the High Performance audio system
Models equipped with the Premium Sound audio system,
the Volvo Navigation System and/or keyless drive
Bulbs used in the car
272
Bulb
Output
Type
Low beam headlight
55W
H7
High beam headlight (applies to vehicles with halogen headlights)
55W
H9
11 Specifications
Electrical system
Bulb
Output
Type
Extra high beam (models with Active Bi-XenonŸ headlights only)
55W
H7
Brake light, back-up light, rear fog light
21W
P21W
21W
PY21W
24W
P21/5W
Rear parking light, side marker light
5W
P21/W5
Footwell lighting, cargo compartment light, license plate lighting
5W
C5W
Vanity mirror
1.2W
Festoon
Front parking light, side turn signal
5W
W5W
Front fog light (option)
35W
H8
Glove compartment light
3W
Festoon
Turn signal, front/rear (applies to models with halogen headlights)
Turn signal, front/rear (models with Active
Bi-XenonŸ
headlights)
11
NOTE
For information regarding any other bulbs
not mentioned in this section, please contact your Volvo retailer or a trained and
authorized Volvo service technician.
273
11 Specifications
Three-way catalytic converter
Three-way catalytic converter –
general information
•
Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition
systems, may cause unusually high threeway catalytic converter temperatures. Do
not continue to operate your vehicle if you
detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of
power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will help
avoid malfunctions that could damage the
three-way catalytic converter.
•
Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system and cause such materials to ignite
under certain wind and weather conditions.
•
Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or
flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating.
•
Remember that tampering or unauthorized
modifications to the engine, the Electronic
Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. This
includes:
11
274
NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.
11 Specifications
Volvo programs
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance
Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON
CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a
separate information package in your glove
compartment.
If you require assistance, dial:
11
American customers: 1-800-638-6586
(1-800-63-VOLVO)
Canadian customers: 1-800-263-0475
Technician certification
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certified technicians have demonstrated a high
degree of competence in specific areas.
Besides passing exams, each technician must
also have worked in the field for two or more
years before a certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze
vehicle problems and perform the necessary
maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at
peak operating condition.
275
12 Index
1, 2, 3 ...
12-volt sockets.......................................... 60
A
A/C (air conditioning)................................. 90
ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 153
12
Active Bi-Xenon headlights........................ 61
Airbags
front...................................................... 22
inflatable curtain................................... 30
side impact........................................... 29
Airbag system............................................ 22
Air conditioning.......................................... 90
Air distribution table................................... 99
Air vents..................................................... 92
Alarm system........................................... 130
turning off sensors.............................. 131
All Wheel Drive......................................... 152
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 153
Approach lighting....................................... 83
Audio files................................................ 250
Audio system
audio functions...................................
automatic sound control.....................
AUX port.............................................
CD changer.........................................
CD player/changer..............................
compact disc care..............................
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II...............
equalizer.............................................
menu settings.....................................
radio functions....................................
selecting a sound source....................
Sirius satellite radio............................
sound settings....................................
steering wheel keypad........................
storing radio stations..........................
subwoofer...........................................
USB/iPOD connector..........................
AUX port.................................................. 240
240
243
240
249
249
251
243
243
253
244
240
245
242
241
244
242
241
B
Backrest, rear seat, folding...................... 111
Bass......................................................... 242
Battery
maintenance.......................................
remote control, replacing...................
specifications......................................
warning symbols.................................
221
120
272
221
Battery – replacing................................... 221
Bi-Xenon headlights.................................. 61
Black Box (Vehicle Event Data)............... 210
Auto-dim rearview mirror........................... 77
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 164
Autolock..................................................... 82
Booster cushion
accessory............................................. 41
Automatic locking retractor....................... 35
Automatic sound control......................... 243
Automatic transmission...........................
kickdown............................................
oil........................................................
shiftlock override................................
149
150
267
151
Automatic transmission - Geartronic....... 150
276
Axle weight...................................... 183, 265
Brake fluid........................................ 219, 267
Brake lights................................................ 62
Brake system
anti-lock brakes (ABS)........................ 153
emergency brake assistance.............. 154
12 Index
Child restraint systems..............................
booster cushions..................................
convertible seats..................................
infant seats...........................................
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................
top tether anchors................................
36
41
39
37
42
44
Capacities, fluids..................................... 267
Child safety................................................
booster cushions..................................
child restraint systems..........................
convertible seats..................................
infant seats...........................................
34
41
36
39
37
Capacity weight............................... 183, 265
Child safety locks.................................... 129
Cargo area
steel grid............................................. 113
Climate system
air distribution....................................... 99
air vents................................................ 92
Electronic Climate Control.................... 96
manual climate control......................... 93
passenger compartment filter.............. 90
refrigerant..................................... 90, 267
fluid..................................................... 219
general information............................. 153
Bulbs
headlights........................................... 223
list of................................................... 272
Bulbs, replacing....................................... 223
C
Cargo area cover..................................... 113
Cargo area net................................. 114, 115
Catalytic converter, three-way................. 274
CD changer.............................................. 249
CD player................................................. 249
Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 254
Central locking system - remote control. 118
Chains...................................................... 186
Changing a wheel.................................... 190
Child restraints
recalls and registration......................... 45
Climate system, general information......... 90
Clock
setting................................................... 82
Coat hanger............................................. 108
Cold weather precautions........................ 137
Compact disc care.................................. 251
Compass in rearview mirror....................... 77
Conserving electrical current................... 138
Convertible seats....................................... 39
Coolant.................................................... 267
changing............................................. 218
checking level of................................. 218
Courtesy lighting...................................... 105
Crash mode............................................... 33
Cruise control............................................ 68
Cup holders..................................... 107, 109
12
Curb weight..................................... 183, 265
D
Detachable key blade.............................. 120
Detachable trailer hitch............................ 162
Dimensions.............................................. 264
Disabling the passenger's side front airbag............................................................. 26
Disconnecting the front passenger’s airbag............................................................. 26
Display....................................................... 58
Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)........................ 243
Door mirrors............................................... 78
277
12 Index
Driving economically................................ 136
Engine compartment overview................ 215
Driving through water.............................. 137
Engine oil.................................................
changing.............................................
checking.............................................
specifications......................................
volumes..............................................
DSTC, stability system............................. 155
E
Economical driving.................................. 136
12
216
216
216
269
267
Fuel gauge................................................. 51
Fuel requirements.................................... 140
Fuel tank volume...................................... 267
Federal Clean Air Act............................... 210
Electronic Climate Control......................... 91
air distribution table.............................. 99
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) - option. 96
Fluids and oils.......................................... 267
Emergency brake....................................... 74
FM1/FM2 menu....................................... 244
Emergency locking retractor...................... 35
Fog lights
front...................................................... 62
rear........................................................ 62
Emergency towing................................... 157
Emission inspection readiness................ 212
Engine
specifications...................................... 270
starting................................................ 144
starting with keyless drive.................. 146
278
F
Flat tires
changing............................................. 190
repairing with tire sealing system....... 192
Emergency starting.................................. 159
Fuel filler door
unlocking.............................................. 63
Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 115
Electrically operated moonroof.................. 80
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)........................................................ 154
102
102
102
103
Equalizer, audio system........................... 243
Electrical current – conserving................ 138
Electrical system...................................... 272
Front seats...............................................
folding backrests................................
manually operated..............................
power..................................................
Front airbags.............................................. 22
disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 26
Front fog lights........................................... 62
Front park assist...................................... 168
Fuses, replacing....................................... 230
G
Gasoline requirements............................. 140
Geartronic................................................ 150
Generator................................................. 272
Glossary of tire terminology..................... 182
Glove compartment................................. 108
locking................................................ 127
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)............ 183, 265
12 Index
H
Infant seats................................................ 37
K
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 30
Hand brake (parking brake)....................... 74
Hands-free connection (cell phone) (Cell
phone, hands-free connection)................ 254
Hazard warning flashers............................ 73
Inflation pressure..................................... 176
Inflation pressure, checking..................... 177
Inflation pressure table
Canadian models................................ 179
US models.......................................... 178
Key blade......................................... 120, 124
Keyless drive
location of antennas (pacemaker warning)...................................................... 125
locking and unlocking the vehicle...... 123
power seat memory............................ 124
starting the engine.............................. 146
Headlights.................................................. 61
Active Bi-Xenon (option)....................... 61
changing bulbs................................... 223
high and low beams............................. 64
high beam flash.................................... 64
Information display.............................. 51, 58
messages in.......................................... 58
Keylock.................................................... 144
Information symbol.................................... 53
Kickdown................................................. 150
Headlight washers..................................... 70
Inspection, preparing for......................... 212
Head restraints, rear seat........................ 111
Inspection readiness................................ 212
High beam flash......................................... 64
Instrument overview.................................. 48
L
High beams................................................ 64
Instrument panel.................................. 48, 51
Label information..................................... 262
Home safe lighting............................... 64, 83
Instrument panel lighting........................... 62
LATCH (ISOFIX) anchors........................... 42
Hood, opening......................................... 214
Interior lighting......................................... 105
Lighting panel............................................ 61
iPOD connector (audio system)............... 241
Load anchoring eyelets........................... 115
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 42
Loading the vehicle
roof loads............................................ 163
I
Ignition switch.......................................... 143
J
Immobilizer.............................................. 144
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 118
Jacket hanger.......................................... 108
Indicator and warning symbols............ 51, 53
Jump starting........................................... 159
12
Locking
from the inside.................................... 127
glove compartment............................. 127
Locking the vehicle.................................. 123
Locks, child safety................................... 129
279
12 Index
Long distance trips.................................. 138
Octane recommendations....................... 140
Power windows......................................... 75
Lug nuts (wheel nuts)............................... 188
Oil............................................................. 216
changing............................................. 216
checking............................................. 216
Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 19
M
On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 275
R
Maintenance............................................ 210
performed by the owner..................... 212
Opening the hood.................................... 214
Owner maintenance................................. 212
Manual climate control.............................. 93
12
Manual transmission........................ 147, 148
Radio functions........................................ 244
P
Mirrors.................................................. 77, 78
Rain sensor - windshield wipers................ 71
Rear fog light............................................. 62
Model plate.............................................. 263
Panel lighting, instrument.......................... 62
Rear park assist....................................... 168
Moonroof................................................... 80
Park assist............................................... 168
Rear seat backrests, folding down.......... 111
Motor oil........................................... 216, 269
checking............................................. 216
Parking brake............................................. 74
Rear seats
center head restraint........................... 111
Parking lights............................................. 61
Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 26
Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 212
Rearview mirror.......................................... 77
auto-dim function................................. 77
Permissible axle weight........................... 183
Rearview mirror with compass (option)..... 77
Personal settings....................................... 82
Recalls, child restraints.............................. 45
Power door mirrors.................................... 78
Refrigerant (A/C system).................... 90, 267
O
Power front seat...................................... 103
memory function................................. 103
Refueling.................................................. 142
fuel tank volume................................. 267
Occupant safety........................................ 16
Power moonroof........................................ 80
Registering child restraints........................ 45
Occupant weight sensor............................ 26
Power steering fluid................................. 219
Remote control........................................ 118
battery replacement............................ 120
N
Net in cargo area............................. 114, 115
280
Radio
Sirius satellite radio............................ 245
12 Index
functions............................................. 118
key blade............................................ 120
unbuckling............................................ 18
use during pregnancy........................... 19
Storage compartments............................ 107
Replacing fuses....................................... 230
Seats, front.............................................. 102
Subwoofer............................................... 242
Reporting safety defects
Canada................................................. 17
USA....................................................... 16
Shiftlock
override............................................... 151
Sunroof (moonroof).................................... 80
Roof loads................................................ 163
Side impact airbags................................... 29
Rotating tires........................................... 189
Supplemental restraint system.................. 21
Side door mirrors....................................... 78
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags....... 29
Sirius satellite radio.................................. 245
Snow chains............................................ 186
S
Studded tires........................................... 186
Snow tires................................................ 186
T
12
Tachometer................................................ 51
Tailgate wipers................................... 71, 220
Safety, occupant........................................ 16
Sound control, automatic........................ 243
Telephone (cellular), hands-free connection (Cell phone, hands-free connection). 254
Safety defects, reporting
Canada................................................. 17
USA....................................................... 16
Sound settings, audio system................. 242
Temporary spare tire............................... 187
Spare tire................................................. 187
Three-way catalytic converter................. 274
Stability system........................................ 155
Dynamic Stability Traction Control
(DSTC)................................................ 155
Tire inflation............................................. 176
Safety locks, child.................................... 129
Seat belt
reminder................................................ 19
Seat belts...................................................
Automatic locking retractor/Emergency
locking retractor....................................
buckling................................................
maintenance.........................................
pretensioners........................................
18
35
18
20
18
Starting the engine................................... 144
with keyless drive............................... 146
Start inhibitor (immobilizer).............. 118, 144
STC, stability system............................... 155
Steering wheel
adjusting............................................... 73
keypad................................................ 241
Tire inflation pressure
Canadian models................................ 179
US models.......................................... 178
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 197
Tires.........................................................
age......................................................
changing.............................................
changing from summer to winter........
designations.......................................
174
175
190
189
180
281
12 Index
12
glossary of terms................................ 182
improving economy............................ 175
inflation............................................... 176
inflation pressure, checking................ 177
inflation pressure table, Canadian models....................................................... 179
inflation pressure table, US models.... 178
load ratings......................................... 177
rotation............................................... 189
snow................................................... 186
spare................................................... 187
speed ratings...................................... 177
storing................................................. 174
studded............................................... 186
tire pressure monitoring system......... 197
tire sealing system.............................. 192
tread wear indicator............................ 175
uniform tire quality grading................. 185
winter driving...................................... 186
Tire sealing system.................................. 192
282
Transmission
Geartronic........................................... 150
manual........................................ 147, 148
shiftlock override................................ 151
Tread wear indicator................................ 175
Vehicle weights........................................ 265
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)......... 263
Volvo Inflatable Curtain.............................. 30
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 275
Treble....................................................... 242
Trip computer............................................ 66
W
Trips, long distance................................. 138
Turn signals............................................... 64
indicator lights...................................... 51
Warning flashers, hazard........................... 73
Warning symbol......................................... 53
Warranties................................................ 210
Washer fluid..................................... 218, 267
U
Washer fluid reservoir...................... 215, 218
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 185
Water, driving through............................. 137
Weights.................................................... 265
Wheel nuts............................................... 188
V
Top tether anchors (child restraint systems).......................................................... 44
Vehicle dimensions.................................. 264
Towing a trailer........................................ 160
trailer hitch.......................................... 162
Vehicle loading......................................... 183
roof loads............................................ 163
Towing the vehicle................................... 157
Trailer hitch - detachable......................... 162
Vehicle maintenance
performed by the owner..................... 212
Trailer towing........................................... 160
Vehicle towing.......................................... 157
Vehicle Event Data................................... 210
Wheels..................................................... 174
changing............................................. 190
storing................................................. 174
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)....... 31
Windows
power.................................................... 75
Windshield washer fluid reservoir............ 215
Windshield wiper blades.......................... 220
12 Index
Windshield wipers...................................... 70
rains sensor.......................................... 71
Winter tires............................................... 186
Wiper blades
replacing tailgate wiper...................... 220
replacing windshield wipers............... 220
12
283
12 Index
12
284
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&%'+)JH68VcVYV!6I%-'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<ŽiZWdg\'%%-!8deng^\]i'%%%"'%%-Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc
Open as PDF
Similar pages